Home

Samsung CLX-3185 multifunctional

Contents

1. 8 Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place NAN SSS NANAN SI AN NN NI o A N 10 Close the front door firmly A If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate Please make sure all toner cartridges are installed properly If any toner cartridge is installed improperly the front door do not close 11 Turn the machine on i elt may takes few minutes for your machine to get ready elf the machine cannot recognize the status of toner cartridges open and close the front door If the problem persists turn the power button off and on Replacing the waste toner container When the life span of the waste toner container has expired the Smart Panel program window appears on the computer indicating the waste toner container needs to be replaced Otherwise your machine stops printing 1 Turn the machine off then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool 2 Using the handle completely open the front door iY Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat surface so that the toner does not spill 4 Remove the container s cap from the container as shown below and then use it to close the waste toner container opening A Do not tilt or turn over the container 5 Take a new waste toner container out of its package Supplies and access
2. OS Contents Windows Printer driver Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine s features e Scanner driver TWAIN and Windows Image Acquisition WIA drivers are available for scanning documents on your machine e Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing e SmarThru This program is the accompanying Windows based software for your multifunctional machine e Samsung Scan and Fax Manager You can find out about Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program information and installed scan driver s condition e Network PC Fax You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only e SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses Microsoft Windows Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems Requirement recommended Macintosh Printer driver Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine s features e Scanner driver TWAIN driver is available for scanning documents on your machine e Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing e Samsung Scan and Fax Manager You can find out about Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program information and installed scan driver s condition e Fax Utilities You can send a fax from your computer without goi
3. Quality Type Single Page Per Side Using a favorite setting The Presets option which is visible on each preferences tab except for the Samsung tab allows you to save the current preferences for future use To save a Presets item follow the steps below 1 Change the settings as needed on each tab 2 Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box Presets Untitled wt Size Ad All Text Black Turned On 3 Click Add When you save Presets all current driver settings are saved If you click Add the Add button changes to the Update button Select more options and click Update settings will be added to the Presets you made To use a Saved setting select it from the Presets drop down list The machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected To delete saved settings select it from the Presets drop down list and click Delete You can also restore the printer driver s default settings by selecting Default Preset from the Presets drop down list Printing_ 2 Using help Click the question mark on the upper right corner of the window and click on the topic you want to know about Then a pop up window appears with information about that option s feature which is provided from the driver If you want to search information via a keyword click the Samsung tab in the Printing Preferences window and enter a keyword in the input line of the Help option To get informatio
4. Subject Message Notify me on delivery 5 Enter the recipients number and set the options if necessary If you want to use a cover page check Use cover page Check Notify me on delivery when the fax is delivered to the recipient successfully 6 Click Send i For the more information about Samsung Network PC Fax click Help Checking a sent fax list Windows You can check a sent fax list on your computer From the Start menu click Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Network PC Fax gt Fax Journal Then the Fax Journal appears with the fax list you have sent Sending a fax Macintosh To send a fax from your computer the Fax Utilities program must be installed This program is installed when you install the printer driver The following steps are based on the Mac OS X 10 5 or 10 6 Depending on the OS version the following steps will be different 1 Open the document to be sent 2 Select Print from the File menu The Print window will be displayed It may look slightly different depending on your application Faxing CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only _ 1 K In case of Mac OS X 10 3 or 10 4 select PDF and Fax PDF 3 Select CLX 3180 Series fax USB from the drop down list in Printer 4 Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to fax 5 Choose your paper size orientation and scale 6 Enter the recipients fax number into To s in
5. e Changing the default print settings e Setting your machine as a default machine e Printing to a file PRN e Macintosh printing e Linux printing Printer driver Feature Windows Machine quality option Booklet printing E Poster printing o Multiple pages per sheet Fit to page printing o Reduce and enlarge printing Watermark 6 Overlay e Double sided printing manual o e supported Blank not supported Basic printing Your machine allows you to print from various Windows Macintosh or Linux applications The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use Z eYour Printing Preferences window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the machine in use However the composition of the Printing Preferences window is similar Check the operating system s that are compatible with your machine Refer to the OS compatibility section of Printer Specifications See System requirements on page 2 eWhen you select an option in Printing Preferences you may see a warning mark Gs or sg An exclamation mark ai means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended and 3 mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine s settings or environment The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications l4 Macintosh basic printing See Macintosh
6. Scanning with network 1 2 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 1 Start Applications and click Image Capture For Mac OS X 10 4 10 5 Click Devices and click Browse Devices For Mac OS X 10 6 Select your device below SHARED Skip to step 7 For Mac OS X 10 4 Select your machine in TWAIN devices option Make sure that Use TWAIN software check box is checked and click Connect elf a warning message appears click Change Port to select port elf TWAIN UI appears from the Preference tab click Change Port to select port IZ Refer to scan manager for Change port use See Setting scan information in Scan and Fax Manager on page 7 For Mac OS X 10 5 Make sure that Connected check box is checked beside your machine in Bonjour Devices If you want to scan using TWAIN refer to the Mac OS X 10 4 steps above 6 Set the scan options on this program 7 Scan and save your scanned image l4 eFor Mac OS X 10 3 use TWAIN compliant software eFor more information about using Image Capture refer to the Image Capture s help eUse TWAIN compliant software to apply more scan options eYou can also scan using TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop Scan process differ according to TWAIN compliant software Please ref
7. 2 Press the left right arrow until Network appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Network Info appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until Yes appears and press OK Using this Network Configuration Report you can find your machine MAC address and IP address For example e MAC Address 00 15 99 41 A2 78 e IP Address 192 0 0 192 IP addresses Every device in a network has a unique numerical address called an IP Address Your machine came with a Default IP address of 192 0 0 192 which you can verify by printing out Network Configuration Report or Configuration Report e DHCP IP assignment Connect your machine to the network and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the machine Then print the Network Configuration Report as explained above If the report shows that the IP address has changed the assignment was successful You will see the new IP address in the e Resetting factory default values e Completing the Installation e Troubleshooting report e Static IP assignment Use SetlP program to change the IP address from your computer See Setting IP address on page 2 In an office environment we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set IP address for your machine Wireless network name and Network Key Wireless networks require higher security When an access point is first set up a network name SSID the type of security used and a Netw
8. 3 Click the Firewall menu 4 Turn firewall off The following instructions may vary for your model 1 Connect your machine to the network with a network cable 2 Insert the Installation CD ROM and open the disk window select MAC Installer gt MAC Printer gt SetIP gt SetIPApplet html 3 Double click the file and Safari will automatically open then select Trust The browser will open the SetIPApplet html page that shows the printer s name and IP address information 4 Click on the t3 icon third from left in the SetlP window to open the TCP IP configuration window 5 Enter the machine s new information into the configuration window as follows In a corporate intranet you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding MAC Address Find the machine s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons For example 00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes 0015992951A8 eIP Address Enter a new IP address for your printer For example if your computer s IP address is 192 168 1 150 enter 192 168 1 X X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer s address Subnet Mask Enter a Subnet Mask Default Gateway Enter a Default Gateway 6 Select Apply then OK and OK again The printer will automatically print the configuration report Confirm that all the settings are correct Quit Safari You may close and eject the installation CD ROM If necessary restart the
9. Open an application and select Print from the File menu Select Print directly using LPR From the LPR GUI window select the model name of your machine from the printer list and click Properties LPR GUI Printer g Status idle accepting jobs Properties Location Description Copies Coples 1 100 h 4 W Collate copies _ Reverse All Pages 3 2 1 Page Selection Allpages w Even pages v Odd pages w Some pages Enter page numbers and or groups of pages to print separated by commas 1 2 5 10 12 17 4 ds Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at the top of the window General This option allows you to change the paper size the paper type and the orientation of the documents It enables the duplex feature adds start and end banners and changes the number of pages per sheet eText This option allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options such as spacing or columns Graphics This option allows you to set image options that are used when printing image files such as color options image size or image position eAdvanced This option allows you to set the print resolution paper source and special print features a Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing The Printing window appears allowing you to monitor the status of y
10. When you enter the MAC address enter it without a colon 6 The machine prints the network information Confirm all the settings are correct 7 Close the SetIP program Network parameter setting You can also set up the various network settings through the network administration programs such as SyncThru Web Admin Service and SyncThru Web Service Restoring factory default settings You may need to reset the machine to the factory default settings when machine that you are using is connected to new network environment Restoring factory default settings using control panel 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until Network appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Clear Setting appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until Yes appears and press OK 5 Turn off and restart machine to apply settings Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru Web Service 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer Safari or Firefox and enter your machine s new IP address in the browser window For example http 7 192 168 1 133 2 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 3 Click Login on the upper right of the website The Login window appears 4 Type in the ID and Password and then click Login If it is your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password eID admin Password sec00000 5 Click Se
11. Customer Care Center Web Site Country Regio n Customer Care Center Web Site ARGENTINE 0800 333 3733 www samsung com ARMENIA 0 800 05 555 AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www samsung com AUSTRIA 0810 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com 0 07 min AZERBAIJAN 088 55 55 555 BAHRAIN 8000 4726 BELARUS 810 800 500 55 500 www samsung ua www samsung com ua_ru BELGIUM 02 201 24 18 www samsung com be Dutch www samsung com be_fr French BRAZIL 0800 124 421 www samsung com 4004 0000 CANADA 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com 726 7864 CHILE 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com CHINA 400 810 5858 www samsung com 010 6475 1880 COLOMBIA 01 8000112112 www samsung com COSTA RICA 0 800 507 7267 www samsung com CZECH 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com REPUBLIC 800 726786 Samsung Zrt Ceska organizacni slozka Oasis Florenc Sokolovska394 17 180 00 Praha 8 DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www samsung com ECUADOR 1 800 10 7267 www samsung com EGYPT 0800 726786 EIRE 0818 717100 www samsung com EL SALVADOR 800 6225 www samsung com ESTONIA 800 7267 www samsung com KAZAKHSTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com kz_ru KYRGYZSTAN 00 800 500 55 500 FINLAND 030 6227 515 www samsung com FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www samsung com GERMANY 01805 SAMSUNG www samsung com 726 7864 0 14 min GEORGIA 8 800 555
12. 20 99 by 29 70 cm Orientation Ta Scale 100 r D 4 Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print 5 Click Print Changing printer settings You can use advanced printing features provided by your machine Open an application and select Print from the File menu The machine name which appears in the printer properties pane may differ depending on the machine in use Except for the name the composition of the printer properties pane is similar to the following Printing_ 6 The setting options may differ depending on models or Macintosh OS versions The following pane may differ depending on your operating system or the application you are using The following pane is the first pane you will see when you open the printer properties pane Select other advanced features from the drop down list Printer sl lal Presets Standard oH Copies Collated C Two Sid Pages All OFrom 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 NGA 20 99 by 29 70 cm Orientation le gt Print header and footer lofi M pore Cancel C Print 4 Supplies Layout The Layout dialog provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper Select Layout from the drop down list to access the following features ePages per Sheet This option determines how many pages to be printed on one page See Printing multipl
13. 6 8 power 8 print screen 8 start black 3 6 start color 3 6 stop clear 3 6 WPS CLX 3185FW only 3 7 C changing clock mode 1 cleaning inside 1 outside 1 scan unit 3 cleaning a machine 1 control panel CLX 3185 CLX 3185N 3 control panel CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW 6 convention 1 copy 6 copy setup 2 copying basic copying 1 changing the copy setup 2 clone copy 3 collation 3 n up copy 2 poster copy 3 reducing or enlarging copies 1 D date and time setting 1 default settings changing the default mode 2 setting a fax header 2 tray setting 6 direct USB 3 6 7 display 3 6 document feeder 1 duplex printing manual printer driver 3 E eco copy 3 Entering using the number keypad 2 eoc copy 6 error message 5 extension telephone 4 F favorites settings for printing 2 fax 6 fax receiving activating secure receive 5 changing the receive mode 4 DRPD mode 4 extension telephone 4 in answering machine fax 4 5 secure receiving 5 fax sending delay sending 3 multi sending 3 redialing the last number 2 resending automatically 2 sending a fax 2 3 fax setup 1 faxing address book 6 adjusting darkness 6 adjusting resolution 5 changing receiving mode 4 changing the fax setup 1 delaying a fax transmission 3 forwarding faxes 6 group dial 7 preparing to fax 1 receiving 4 receiving a fax in memory 5 receiving in Ans Fax mode 4 receiving in Tel mode 4 receiving with an extension tel
14. 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Backing up data Data in the machine s memory can be accidentally erased due to power failure or storage failure Backup helps you protect the system settings by storing them as backup files on a USB memory device Backing up data 1 Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press OK when Machine Setup appears Press the left right arrow until Export Setting appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the option you want appears For CLX 3185N 3185WK Setup Data option is only available For CLX 3185FN 3185FW Setup Data and Address Book options are available 7 Press OK to begin backing up the data The data is backed up to the USB memory Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode DARN Restoring data 1 Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to the USB memory port Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press OK when Machine Setup appears Press the left right arrow until Import Setting appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the data type you want appears and press OK For CLX 3185N Setup Data option is only available For CLX 3185FN 3185FW Setup Data and Address Book options are available 7 Press the left right arr
15. 9 using a wired network 1 using a wireless network 1 network setup 4 number keypad 6 N up copy 2 N up printing Macintosh 7 Windows 3 O on hook dial 6 original document clearing jam 2 loading in the document feeder 1 on the scanner glass 1 output support 6 overlay printing create 5 delete 5 print 5 P placing a machine adjusting the altitude 1 spacing 1 poster 3 power button 3 6 power off button 8 power saver using power save mode 3 print media card stock 6 envelope 5 glossy paper 6 guidelines 2 labels 5 letterhead paper 6 output support 3 preprinted paper 6 setting the paper size 6 setting the paper type 6 transparency 5 print resolution set Linux 8 print resolution set Macintosh 7 print screen button 3 printer driver features 1 printer preferences Linux 8 printing changing the default print settings 6 changing the print percentage 4 fitting your document to a selected paper size 4 Linux 7 Macintosh 6 multiple pages on one sheet of paper Macintosh 7 Windows 3 poster 3 printing a document Windows 1 printing on both sides of paper Windows 3 printing to a file 6 USB memory 2 using overlay 5 using watermarks 4 printing a document Linux 7 Macintosh 6 problems copying problems 14 paper feeding problems 9 power problems 8 printing quality problems 11 R rear view CLX 3185 CLX 3185N 2 rear view CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW 5 redial pause 6
16. PSTN is the network of the world s public circuit switched telephone networks which on industrial premises is usually routed through the switchboard RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA authentication authorization and accounting concept to manage network access Resolution The sharpness of an image measured in Dots Per Inch DPI The higher the dpi the greater the resolution SMB Server Message Block SMB is a network protocol mainly applied to share files printers serial ports and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network It also provides an authenticated Inter process communication mechanism SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is the standard for e mail transmissions across the Internet SMTP is a relatively simple text based protocol where one or more recipients of a message are specified and then the message text is transferred It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to the server SSID Service Set Identifier SSID is a name of a wireless local area network WLAN All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other The SSIDs are case sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters Subnet Mask The subnet mask is
17. The adhesive material should be stable at your machine s fusing temperature about 170 C 338 F Arrangement Only use labels with no exposed backing between them Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels causing serious jams Curl Prior to printing labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm 0 51 inches of curl in any direction Condition Do not use labels with wrinkles bubbles or other indications of separation e Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can Cause paper jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components e Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once The Media and tray_ 5 adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine e Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled bubbled or otherwise damaged CardStock Custom sized paper Postcards cards and other custom sized materials can be printed with your machine e Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm 3 inches wide or 152 4 mm 6 inches long e In software applications set the margins at least 6 4 mm 0 25 inches away from the edges of the material Letterhead Preprinted paper Letterhead Preprinted materials can be printed with your machine e Letterhead Preprinted paper must be printed with heat resistant ink that will
18. The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective If possible attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job You can also try using a different machine cable The port setting is incorrect Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port If the computer has more than one port make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one The machine may be configured incorrectly Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct See Opening printing preferences on page 2 A print job is The job may be very Reduce the complexity of the extremely slow complex page or try adjusting the print quality settings Half the page is The page Change the page orientation blank orientation setting may be incorrect in your application See the printer driver help screen The paper size and the paper size settings do not match Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray Or ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use The printer driver may be incorrectly installed Repair the machine software See Installing USB connected machine s driver on page 3 The machine is malfunctioning Check the
19. The document will be saved as a PRN file rather than printed on paper Only PRN files created in this fashion can be printed directly from USB memory See Printing to a file PRN on page 6 to learn how to create a PRN file e BMP BMP Uncompressed e TIFF TIFF 6 0 Baseline e JPEG JPEG Baseline To print a document from a USB memory device 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine and then press Direct USB If one has already been inserted press Direct USB 2 Press OK when USB print appears Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it 3 Press the left right arrow until the folder or file you want appears and press OK If you see D in the front of a folder name there are one or more files or folders in the selected folder 4 lf you selected a file skip to the next step If you selected a folder press the left right arrow until the file you want appears 5 Press the left right arrow to select the number of copies to be printed or enter the number 6 Press OK Color Start or Black Start to start printing the selected file There are two types of mode as following e OK or Color Start Color print Black Start Black and White print After printing the file the display asks if you want to print another job 7 Press OK when Yes appears to print another job and repeat from step 2 Otherwise press the left right arrow to select No and press OK
20. WPA also uses TKIP Temporal Key Integrity Protocol and AES Advanced Encryption Standard for data encryption 16 The window shows the wireless network setting and check if settings are right Click Next For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP check if DHCP is shown in the window However if it shows Static click Change TCP IP to change the assignment method to DHCP eFor the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static check if Static is shown in the window However if it shows DHCP click Change TCP IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration Wireless network setup CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only 6 values for the machine Before entering the IP address for the machine you must know the computer s network configuration information If the computer is set to DHCP you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address Example If computer s network information is as below IP address 169 254 133 42 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Machine s network information should be as below IP address 169 254 133 43 Use computer s IP address with changed last three digits Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Use the computer s subnet mask Gateway 169 254 133 1 Change the last three digits from IP address of your machine to 1 17 The wireless network is connecting according to the network configuration 18 When the wireless network setting is completed di
21. c Select Repair or Remove as you wish to execute then follow the instruction in the window Macintosh The software CD that came with your machine provides you with the Driver files that allow you to use the CUPS driver or PostScript driver only available when you use a machine which supports the PostScript driver for printing on a Macintosh computer Also it provides you with the TWAIN driver for scanning on a Macintosh computer moh Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive 3 Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop 4 Double click the MAC_Installer folder 5 Double click the Installer OS X icon 6 Enter the password and click OK 7 The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue 8 Read the license agreement and click Continue 9 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement 10 Select Easy Install and click Install Easy Install is recommended for most users All components necessary for machine operations will be installed If you select Custom Install you can choose individual components to install 11 When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears click Continue 12 Select Typical installation for a local printer and then click OK 13 The Installation process is being executed 14 The Fax Queue Creator window appears during the instal
22. consider the following factors Weight The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g m otherwise jams may occur Construction Prior to printing envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm 0 24 inches curl and should not contain air Condition Envelopes should not be wrinkled nicked nor damaged Temperature Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation e Use only well constructed envelopes with sharp and well creased folds e Do not use stamped envelopes e Do not use envelopes with clasps snaps windows coated lining self adhesive seals or other synthetic materials e Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes e Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope iy Ia 1 Acceptable 2 Unacceptable e Envelopes with a peel off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine s fusing temperature about 170 C 338 F for 0 1 second The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling creasing or jams and may even damage the fuser e For the best print quality position margins no closer than 15 mm 0 59 inches from the edges of the envelope e Avoid printing over the area where the envelope s seams meet Transparencies To avoid damaging the machine use only transparencies designed for laser printers l4 In case of colo
23. e Bu r n n ortalama ya am s resi 7 y l garanti suresi 2 yildir Regulatory information_ 4 Fax Branding The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information 1 the date and time of transmission 2 identification of either business business entity or individual sending the message and 3 telephone number of either the sending machine business business entity or individual The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68 If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment or otherwise materially affect its use or performance the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service Ringer Equivalence Number The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on th
24. regulatiory information 1 resolution faxing 5 S safety information 1 symbols 1 scan to button 3 scan email 7 scanner glass 1 loading documents 1 scanner glass loading documents 1 scanning basic information 1 for local connection 1 Linux 7 Macintosh 7 TWAIN 6 USB flash memory 1 WIA 6 serial number 1 service contact numbers 1 SetIP program 2 3 8 9 setting default paper 3 Smart Panel general information 2 specifications general 1 print media 3 start button black 3 6 start button color 3 6 status LED 3 6 stop clear button 3 6 supplies available supplies 1 estimated toner cartridge life 4 ordering 1 SyncThru Web Service general information 1 toner cartridge estimated life 4 handling instructions 4 non Samsung and refilled 4 redistributing toner 1 storing 4 toner color 3 7 tray adjusting the width and length 2 changing the tray size 2 setting the paper size and type 6 TWAIN scan 6 U USB cable driver installation 3 USB flash memory data backup 2 managing 3 printing 2 scanning 1 using help 3 W watermark create 4 delete 5 edit 4 print 4 WIA scan 6 Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS 9 Windows common Windows problems 15 driver installation for network connected 3 driver installation for USB cable connected 3 printing 1 scanning 1 sharing a machine locally 5 supplied software 2 system requirements 2 using SetIP 2 8 Windows 7
25. scan
26. 3186 CLX 3185N CLX 3185NK CLX 3186N CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3186FN CLX 3185FW Print Duplex 2 sided printing manual Copy Eco Copy Scan Fax Network PC fax On Hook Dial USB 2 0 USB Memory Interface Direct USB IPv6 Network Interface Ethernet 10 100 Base TX wired LAN Network Interface 802 11b n g wireless LAN SyncThru Web Service Print Screen Automatic Document Feeder ADF e Included o Optional Blank Not available Z CLX 3180K CLX 3185 CLX 3185K and CLX 3186 are the same machine despite the name difference This User s Guide is written on the basis of CLX 3185 eCLX 3185N CLX 3185NK and CLX 3186N are the same machine despite the name difference This User s Guide is written on the basis of CLX 3185N eCLX 3185FN and CLX 3186FN are the same machine despite the name difference This User s Guide is written on the basis of CLX 3185FN Features of your new product_ 2 introduction This chapter gives you an overview of your machine This chapter includes e Machine overview CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185Wk e Understanding the Status LED e Control panel overview CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK e Introducing the useful buttons e Machine overview CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW e Acknowledging the status of the toner cartridge e Control panel overview CLX 3185F N CLX 3185FW Machine overview CLX 3185 CLX 318
27. 555 GUATEMALA 1 800 299 0013 www samsung com HONDURAS 800 7919267 www samsung com HONG KONG 852 3698 4698 www samsung com hk www samsung com hk_en HUNGARY 06 80 SAMSUNG www samsung com 726 7864 INDIA 3030 8282 www samsung com 1800 110011 1800 3000 8282 1800 266 8282 INDONESIA 0800 112 8888 www samsung com 021 5699 7777 ITALIA 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com JAMAICA 1 800 234 7267 www samsung com JAPAN 0120 327 527 www samsung com JORDAN 800 22273 KSA 9200 21230 www samsung com LATVIA 8000 7267 www samsung com LITHUANIA 8 800 77777 www samsung com LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www samsung com MALAYSIA 1800 88 9999 www samsung com MEXICO 01 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com 726 7864 MOLDOVA 00 800 500 55 500 www samsung ua www samsung com ua ru NETHERLANDS 0900 SAMSUNG www samsung com 0900 7267864 0 10 min NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG 0800 726 www samsung com 786 NICARAGUA 00 1800 5077267 www samsung com NORWAY 815 56 480 www samsung com PANAMA 800 7267 www samsung com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 1 Country Regio n Customer Care Center Web Site PHILIPPINES 1800 10 SAMSUNG 726 7864 1 800 3 SAMSUNG 726 7864 1 800 8 SAMSUNG 726 7864 02 5805777 www samsung com Country Regio n Customer Care Center Web Site UZBEKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com kz_ru VENEZUELA 0 800 100 5303 www samsung com VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www samsung com POLAND 0 801 1SA
28. 90 g m 19 to 24 Ibs bond 130 sheets of 80 g m 21 Ibs Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 50 x 14 00 inches bond paper for the tray US Folio 216 x 330 mm 8 50 x 13 00 inches A4 210 x 297 mm 8 27 x 11 69 inches Oficio 216 x 343 mm 8 50 x 13 50 inches JIS B5 182 x 257 mm 7 17 x 10 12 inches ISO B5 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 inches Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 25 x 10 50 inches A5 148 x 210 mm 5 83 x 8 26 inches A6 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 82 inches Envelope Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm 3 87 x 7 50 inches 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ibs bond 5 sheets for manual feeding in Envelope 6 3 4 92 x 165 mm 3 62 x 6 50 inches MGUay Envelope No 10 105 x 241 mm 4 12 x 9 50 inches Envelope No 9 98 x 225 mm 3 87 x 8 87 inches Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 inches Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm 6 38 x 9 02 inches Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm 4 49 x 6 38 inches Thick paper Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section 90 to 105 g m 24 to 28 Ibs bond 5 sheets for manual feeding in paper section the tray Thin paper Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g m 16 to 19 Ibs bond paper section Labels Letter A4 Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g m 37 to 40 Ibs bond Card stock Post card 101 60 x 152 4 mm 4 x 6 inches 105 to 163 g m 28 to 43 Ibs bond Transparency Letter A4 Refer to the Plain paper section 1 sheet for manual feeding in the Glossy photo Letter A4 Postcard 4 x6 Refer to
29. Access Control MAC address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter MAC address is a unique 48 bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs e g 00 00 0c 34 11 4e This address is usually hard coded into a Network Interface Card NIC by its manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks MFP Multi Function Peripheral MFP is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body so as to have a printer a copier a fax a scanner and etc MH Modified Huffman MH is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU T T 4 MH is a codebook based run length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space As most faxes consist mostly of white space this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes MMR Modified Modified READ MMR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 6 Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information MR Modified Read MR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 4 MR encodes the first scanned line using MH The next line is compared to the first the differences determined and then the differences are encoded and transmitted NetWare A network op
30. CLX 3185N CLX 3185F N CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FW only on page 1 WPS CLX 3185WK If your wireless access point supports Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS you can configure the machine easily without a computer See WPS button CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FW only on page 9 Introduction 3 Machine overview CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW Front view This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model Document width guides 5 Tray 1 Control panel Imaging unit Document feeder input tray 6 Front door handle Document feeder cover Scanner lid Document feeder output tray Front door Toner cartridges Scanner glass HIBI6IO SOs 2 amp amp amp USB port Document output tray Waste toner container Scan unit Introduction_ 4 Rear view This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model 1 Rear door handle 5 Network port 2 Rear door 6 Telephone line socket 3 Power cord receptacle Extension telephone socket EXT 4 USB port Introduction 5 Control panel overview CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model 7 8 LF FAW NAN ON AN ASIS UA LA A NAN NAN S GG ae Power Allows you to turn the power on and off See Power button on page 8 Eco Copy CLX 3185F
31. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Advanced Options Use the following Graphics options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs iH If the option is grayed out or not shown that option is not applicable with the printer language you are using 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Graphics tab Z The options you can select may vary depending on your machine Refer to the help for each option s information provided from the Printing Preferences eFont Text Select Darken Text to print text darker than on a normal document Use All Text Black to prints solid black regardless of the color it appears on the screen Graphic Controller Fine Edge allows you to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability Grayscale Enhancement allows users to preserve the details of nature photos and improve contrast and readability among gray scaled colors when printing color documents in grayscale Toner Save Adjusting this option extends the life of your toner cartridges and reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality You can move the slider from No Saving to Maximum Saving to reduce toner consumption 3 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Printing 5 Changing the default print settings 1 Click the Windows Sta
32. IP address and other network configuration values for the machine Before entering the IP address for the machine you must know the computer s network configuration information If the computer is set to DHCP you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address Example If computer s network information is as below IP address 169 254 133 42 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Machine s network information should be as below IP address 169 254 133 43 Use computer s IP address with changed last three digits Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Use the computer s subnet mask Gateway 169 254 133 1 Change the last three digits from IP address of your machine to 1 9 When the wireless network setting is completed disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine Click Next 10 The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the setup procedure Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen Then click Next 11 Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears 12 Select the components to be installed Click Next After selecting the components you can also change the machine name set the machine to be shared on the network set the machine as the default machine and change the port name of each machine Click Next 13 After the installation is finished a window asking you to print a test page appears If you
33. If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to install the software you have to use the driver in the text mode Follow the steps 3 to 4 and then follow the instructions on the terminal screen iY If the printer driver does not work properly uninstall the driver and reinstall it Follow the steps below to uninstall the driver for Linux a Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on b When the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password You must log in as a super user root to uninstall the printer driver If you are not a Super user ask your system administrator c Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop When the Terminal screen appears type in the following root localhost root cd opt Samsung mfp uninstall root localhost uninstall uninstall sh d Click Uninstall e Click Next f Click Finish Sharing your machine locally Follow the steps below to set up computers to share your machine locally If the host computer is directly connected to the machine with a USB cable and is also connected to the local network environment client computers connected to the local network can use the shared machine through the host computer to print a D 2 GG dp cp dp A computer which is directly connected to Host com
34. Mac OS X 3 Click Printer Setting IZ If your machine is connected to the network you can set the altitude via SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Setting gt Altitude Adjustment Select the appropriate value from the drop down list and then click Apply Z You can also set the altitude in System Setup gt Machine Setup gt Altitude Adj option on the machine s display Changing the display language To change the language that appears on the display follow the steps below e Entering characters using the number keypad CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only e Using the save modes e Setting the default paper e Setting job timeout e Setting the humidity mode Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Machine Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Language appears and press OK Press the left right arrow to display the language you want Press OK to save the selection Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode oo Se eS Setting the date and time CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only When you set the time and date they are used in delay fax and delay print They are printed on reports If however they are not correct you need to change it for the correct time being i If the machine s power is cut off you need to reset the correct time and date once the power has been restored Press Menu on the control
35. Make sure the door is securely latched and then turn the machine on A If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate Replacing the imaging unit When the life span of the imaging unit has expired the Smart Panel program window appears on the computer indicating the imaging unit needs to be placed Otherwise your machine may stop printing 1 Ifthe machine is printing from the computer or warming up wait until the job ends Then turn the machine off 2 Using the handle completely open the front door 3 Grasp the handles on the front cartridge and pull to remove four cartridges from the machine 5 Pull the imaging unit out of the machine using the groove on the front of the imaging unit 6 Take a new imaging unit out of its package Remove the protective devices on both sides of the imaging unit and the paper protecting the surface of the imaging unit A eDon t use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the imaging unit package eDo not touch the drum located in the imaging unit Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area eBe careful not to scratch the surface of imaging unit eTo prevent damage do not expose the imaging unit to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper to protect it if necessary Supplies and accessories_ 3 7 Holding the groove on the front of the imaging unit push imaging unit in to the machine
36. Preferences and select Print amp Fax settings Select the printer you want to reset opening the Print Queue and select the Utility icon in the top menu bar Safari will open the printer s SyncThru Web Service page 3 Click Settings gt Network Settings in the top menu bar 4 Click Restore Default in the left side bar and click the Clear button next to Factory Default or Network Click OK in each of the following three windows that pop up 5 Disconnect the printer from the network recycle the power and print a Network Configuration Report to confirm the reset This will reset all the parameters and the printer will no longer be on the network Network parameter setting You can also set up the various network settings through the network administration programs such as SyncThru Web Admin Service and SyncThru Web Service Completing the Installation After you have installed your Samsung wireless network printer print another copy of the Network Configuration Report and keep it for future reference You are now ready to use your new Samsung wireless printer on your network Troubleshooting K Solving problems that might occur during wireless setting and installing the machine driver Wireless network problems If problems occur while using the machine on a network check the followings Printer Not Found eYour computer or machine may not turn on Turn on your computer or machine eUSB cable is not
37. Press the left right arrow until New amp Edit appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until Group Dial appears and press OK 5 Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK 6 Enter the name you want to edit and press OK 7 Enter the speed dial number you want to add or delete and press OK 8 Press OK when the speed dial information appears correctly If you entered a new speed dial number Add appears If you enter a speed dial number stored in the group Delete appears 9 Press OK to add or delete the number 10 Press OK when Yes appears to add or delete more numbers and repeat steps 7 and 8 11 When you have finished press the left right arrow to select No at the Another No and press OK 12 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Using group dial numbers To use a group dial entry you need to search for and select it from memory When you are prompted to enter a fax number while sending a fax press Address Book See below Searching Address Book for an entry There are two ways to search for a number in memory You can either scan from A to Z sequentially or you can search by entering the first letters of the name associated with the number Searching sequentially through the memory 1 Press Ss Fax on the control panel 2 Press Address Book on the control panel 3 Press the left right arrow until Search amp Dial appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the number cat
38. Print quality is affected by humidity levels Paper may be damp if your location is a humid area set the humidity mode 1 Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided Printer Software CD 2 Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar or Notification Area in Linux You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X 3 Click Printer Setting IZ If your machine is connected to the network you can set the humidity mode via SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Setting gt Humidity Select the appropriate value from the drop down list and then click Apply Z You can also set the humidity mode in System Setup gt Machine Setup gt Humidity option on the machine s display Basic setup_ 4 media and tray This chapter provides information on how to load originals and print media into your machine This chapter includes e Loading originals e Selecting print media e Changing the tray size for print media e Loading paper in the tray Z Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your model name Loading originals You can use the scanner glass to load an original for copying or scanning On the scanner glass Using the scanner glass you can copy or scan originals You can get the best scan quality especially for colored or gray scaled images 1 Lift and open the scanner lid e Printin
39. S A EE AIER an Kk Shc 365 ka abe AA E E H ale ZB 7th Radio Frequency Emissions FCC Information to the User This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference and e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help 4 Change or mod
40. SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tih cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product
41. This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for machine s functionality For machine scanners I O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers automatically so proper settings are applied by default Management tools_ 5 maintenance This chapter provides information about maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge This chapter includes e Adjusting the color contrast e Finding the serial number e Cleaning the machine Adjusting the color contrast Color menu allows you to adjust the color setting Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Color appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Custom Color appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the color menu you want to appears on display and press OK o o ao NG WH You can adjust the contrast of each color independently Default optimizes the color contrast automatically Manual Adjust allows you to manually adjust the color contrast for each cartridge Default setting is recommended for getting best color quality 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Z If you have moved the machine it is strongly recommended to operate this menu manually Finding the serial number When you call for service or register as a user on the Samsung website the machine s
42. Twain driver to scan quickly in Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program eYou can also scan by pressing Window s Start gt Control Panel gt Samsung Scan and Fax Manager gt Quick Scan For network connected machine CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only Make sure the printer driver is installed on your computer using the software CD since the printer driver includes the scan program See Installing wired network connected machine s driver on page 3 1 Make sure that your machine and the computer are connected to a network and Samsung Scan and Fax Manager is installed on the computer 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the ADF For details about loading an original see Loading originals on page 1 3 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ For CLX 3185N and CLX 3185WK press Scan to on the control panel For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW press Scan on the control panel 4 Press the left right arrow until Scan to PC appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until Network PC appears and press OK IZ If you see Not Available message check the port connection 6 Select your registered computer ID and enter the Password if necessary l4 eID is the same ID as the registered Computer ID for Samsung Scan and Fax Manager ePassword is the 4 digit number registered Password for Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 7 Press the
43. ZA RREA AE P EH SJ T 11363 2006 PERLE AY PR EK o A ERA HAHA maA AAEE A ACE AZ NE KRR ARAE HA Ja BO Ar i Ee Ee EA EA Wi EOLA CBA RRR E PEIN ICR PACU SLL PS EAE SIT 11363 2006 BRI TTI KAMI BI Regulatory information_ 10 Regulatory information 11 about this user s guide This user s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during actual usage It is a valuable resource for both novice and professional users for the proper installation and use of the machine l4 eRead the safety information before using the machine See Safety information on page 1 elf you have a problem using the machine refer to the troubleshooting chapter See Troubleshooting on page 1 Terms used in this user s guide are explained in the glossary chapter See Glossary on page 1 elllustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models The procedures in this user s guide are mainly based on Windows XP Convention Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably as below e Document is synonymous with original e Paper is synonymous with media or print media e Machine refers to printer or MFP The following table offers the conventions of this guide Convention Description Example Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine St
44. be used depending on the need for data security Shared Key Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network eEncryption Select the encryption None WEP64 WEP128 Network Key Enter the encryption network key value Confirm Network Key Confirm the encryption network key value WEP Key Index If you are using the WEP Encryption select the appropriate WEP Key Index Z The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network has security setting The wireless network security window appears Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next eWEP Wired Equivalent Privacy is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64 bit or 128 bit WEP encryption key 8 The window shows the wireless network setting and check if settings are right Click Next Before entering the IP address for the machine you must know the computer s network configuration information If the computer s network configuration is set to DHCP the wireless network setting should also be DHCP Likewise if the computer s network configuration is set to Static the wireless network setting should also be Static If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network setting you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address For
45. catalog and newspaper background e The print quality and image size may be adjusted and enhanced at the same time Scan the originals and send it right away e Scan in color and use the precise compressions of BMP JPEG TIFF and PDF formats w Quickly scan and send files to multiple destination using networking scanning See For network connected machine CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only on page 2 IPv6 CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only e The machine supports IPv6 See IPv6 Configuration on page 6 for the more information Set a specific time to transmit a Fax CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only e You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also send the fax to several stored destinations e After the transmission the machine may point out the fax reports according to the setting Eco copy CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN only e You can cut toner consumption and paper usage See Eco Copy button CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN only on page 8 for the more information Features of your new product 1 Features by Models The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing and copying to more advanced networking solutions for your business Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on models or countries The below table is a listing of the major features by each model Features CLX 3180K CLX 3185 CLX 3185K CLX
46. computer s firewall You have successfully changed the IP address subnet mask and gateway Configuring the machine s wireless network Before starting you will need to know the network name SSID of your wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted This information was set when the wireless router access point was installed If you do not know about your wireless environment please ask the person who has set up your network To configure wireless parameters you can use SyncThru Web Service Using SyncThru Web Service Before starting the wireless parameter configuration make sure cable connection status 1 Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine If not connect the machine with a standard network cable 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer Safari or Firefox and enter your machine s new IP address in the browser window For example r http 4 192 168 1 1337 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login on the upper left of the website A Login page appears 5 Type in the ID and Password then click Login If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password eID admin Password sec00000 6 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Settings gt Network Settings 7 Click Wireless gt Wizard Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configura
47. connected between your computer and machine Connect machine to your computer using a USB cable eThe machine does not support wireless network Check the User s Guide included on the software CD supplied with your machine and prepare a wireless network machine Connecting Failure Not Found SSID The machine is unable to search network name SSID which is you selected or entered name Check the network name SSID on your access point and re try to connect eYour access point is not turned on Turn on your access point Connecting Failure Invalid Security eYou configured security incorrectly Check the configured security on your access point and machine Connection Failure General Connection Error eYour computer is not receiving a signal from your machine Check the USB cable and your machine power Connection Failure Connected Wired Network eYour machine is connected with wired network cable Remove the wired network cable from your machine PC Connecting Error The configured network address is unable to connect between your computer and machine For DHCP network environment The machine receives the IP address automatically DHCP when the computer is configured DHCP For Static network environment The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured with the static address If your computer is configured with the following addresses IP address 192 168 1 100 Wireless network set
48. details see Printing sent fax report automatically on page 8 Copy setup Changing the copy setup options For copy output you can set up several options in advance 1 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ For CLX 3185 CLX 3185N and CLX 3185WK press Menu on the control panel For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW press 9 Copy and Menu in order on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until Copy Setup appears and press OK a Press the left right arrow until Change Default appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the copy setup item you want appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the setup option you want appears and press OK 6 Press the left right arrow until the setting you want appears and press OK Machine status and advanced feature 2 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 as needed 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Change Default Option Description Scan Size You can select the size of original Copies You can enter the number of copies using the number keypad Copy Collation You can set the machine to sort the copy job For further details see Deciding the form of copy output on page 3 Reduce Enlarge You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image Darkness You can adjust the brightness level to make a copy that is easier to read when the original contains faint markings and dark im
49. display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error If the error cannot be cleared contact a service representative Troubleshooting 10 Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The machine prints but the text is wrong garbled or incomplete The machine cable is loose or defective Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect Try a print job that you have already printed successfully If possible attach the cable and the machine to another computer and try a print job that you know works Finally try a new printer cable The wrong printer driver was selected Check the application s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected The software application is malfunctioning Try printing a job from another application The operating system is malfunctioning Exit Windows and reboot the computer Turn the machine off and back on again Pages print but they are blank The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner Redistribute the toner if necessary See Redistributing toner on page 1 If necessary replace the toner cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 The file may have blank pages Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages Some parts such as the controller or the board may be defective Contact a service representative The
50. enclosed in brackets Network setup CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only 6 Wireless network set Si c1x 3185fw cIx 3185wk only This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the wireless network connected machine and software This chapter includes e Using a wireless network e Setting a wireless network with WPS button on the control panel e Setting a wireless network with USB cable e Setting a wireless network with network cable Z For more information about network environment network programs and Installing network connected machine s driver refer to following chapters See Network environment on page 1 See Introducing useful network programs on page 1 See Setting a wireless network with USB cable on page 3 See Setting a wireless network with network cable on page 8 Using a wireless network Choosing your network connection Typically you can only have one connection between your computer and the machine at a time There are two types of network connections to consider e Wireless network without an access point Ad Hoc mode e Wireless network with an access point Infrastructure mode Printing a network configuration report You can print Network Configuration Report from the machine s control panel that will show the current machine s network settings This will help you to set up a network and troubleshoot problems 1 Press Menu on the control panel
51. field and enter the system password iY You must log in as a super user root to install the machine software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator 3 From the Samsung website download and unpack the Smart Panel package to your computer 4 Click i at the bottom of the desktop When the Terminal screen appears type in the following root localhost root tar zxf FilePath SmartPanel tar gz root localhost root cd FilePath cdroot Linux smartpanel root localhost smartpanel install sh iY If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to install the software you have to use the driver in the text mode Follow the steps 3 to 4 and then follow the instructions on the terminal screen Installing the Printer Settings Utility 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 When the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password iY You must log in as a super user root to install the machine software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator 3 From the Samsung website download and unpack the Printer Settings Utility package to your computer 4 Click F at the bottom of the desktop When the Terminal screen appears type in the following root localhost root tar zxf FilePath PSU tar gz root localhost root cd FilePath cdroot Linux psu root localhost psu install sh Z
52. leaks pi PB This could result in electric shock or fire AN Caution disconnect all cords then lift the machine with at least two people gt The machine could fall causing injury or machine damage Do not place the machine on an unstable surface gt The machine could fall causing injury or machine damage The machine should be connected to S the power level which is specified on the label gt If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using contact the electrical utility company Q Use only No 26 AWG or larger telephone line cord if Q necessary gt Otherwise it can cause damage to the machine a AWG American Wire Gauge Maintenance Checking When moving the machine turn the power off and O Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight location such as a closet gt If the machine is not well ventilated this could result in fire Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical outlet gt Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords gt This can diminish performance and could result in electric shock or fire Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe operation If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters 6 feet with a 140V machine then the gauge should be 16 AWG or larger gt Otherwise it can cause damage to the ma
53. mode O YN DAD DB DdOADAD DAD O AN UW A DO AAO W NN N N N N BAON N NN o A Receiving faxes in memory Adjusting the document settings Resolution Darkness Forwarding a fax to another destination Forwarding a sent fax to another destination Forwarding a received fax to another destination Forwarding a sent fax to email address Forwarding a received fax to email address Setting up Address Book Speed dial numbers Group dial numbers Searching Address Book for an entry Printing sent fax report automatically USING USB MEMORY DEVICE CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FW ONLY About USB memory Plugging in a USB memory device Scanning to a USB memory device Scanning Customizing Scan to USB Printing from a USB memory device To print a document from a USB memory device Backing up data Backing up data Restoring data Managing USB memory Deleting an image file Formatting a USB memory device Viewing the USB memory status MACHINE STATUS AND ADVANCED FEATURE Fax setup CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Changing the fax setup options Sending Receiving Change Default Auto Report Copy setup Changing the copy setup options Change Default Printing a report Clearing memory Network CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Menu overview MANAGEMENT TOOLS mb NAUBAOXOD XD XD OW DN N NN PDBRBBBRBRBROSZA a N sm onnauna RWW N a ae gt O Introducing useful management tools Using SyncTh
54. mode for each scanning to USB job Press 3 Scan on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until Scan Feature appears and press OK Press OK when USB Feature appears Press the left right arrow until the setting option you want appears and press OK You can set the following options Scan Size Sets the image size Original Type Sets the original document s type Resolution Sets the image resolution Scan Color Sets the color mode If you select Mono in this option you cannot select JPEG in Scan Format Scan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved When you select TIFF or PDF you can select to scan multiple pages If you select JPEG in this option you cannot select Mono in Scan Color Aa Ye 6 Press the left right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK 7 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set other setting options 8 When you have finished press Stop Clear to return to ready mode You can change the default scan settings For details see Changing the default scan settings on page 3 Printing from a USB memory device You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device You can print TIFF BMP JPEG and PRN files File types supported by Direct Print option e PRN Only files created by provided driver with your machine are compatible e PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when you print a document
55. or numeric keypad Press Start to begin copying One complete document will print followed by the second complete document Copying_ 4 S canning Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer This chapter includes 4 Z Basic scanning method Scanning originals and sending to your computer Scan to PC Scanning by a network connection Scan to Email CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Changing the settings for each scan job Changing the default scan settings The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors including a computer speed available disk space memory the size of the image being scanned and color bit depth settings Thus depending on your system and what you are scanning you may not be able to scan at a certain resolution especially using enhanced resolution elt could be scanned different color with fluorescent color due to the property of scanner Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model Check your model name See Features by Models on page 2 Basic scanning method You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the network Samsung Scan and Fax Manager Scan the originals from the control panel Then the scanned data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder When you install all the software in the supplied CD the S
56. original face down on the scanner glass For details about loading an original see Loading originals on page 1 2 Enter the number of copies using the left right arrow if necessary 3 If you want to customize the copy settings including Reduce Enlarge Darkness Original Type and more by using the control panel buttons See Changing the settings for each copy on page 1 4 Press Color Start to begin color copying Or press Black Start to begin black and white copying The following is the normal copy procedure for a machine with an ADF such as CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW 1 Press DS Copy on the control panel 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See On the scanner glass on page 1 or In the document feeder CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only on page 1 3 If you want to customize the copy settings including Reduce Enlarge Darkness Original Type and more by using the control panel buttons See Changing the settings for each copy on page 1 4 Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number keypad if necessary 5 Press Color Start to begin color copying Or press Black Start to begin black and white copying if If you need to cancel the copying job during the operation press Stop Clear and the copying will stop Changing the settings for each copy Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly and easily m
57. panel Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Machine Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Date amp Time appears and press OK Enter the correct time and date using left right arrow or numeric keypad Month 01 to 12 Day 01 to 31 Year requires four digits Hour 01 to 12 Minute 00 to 59 You can also select AM or PM by using the number keypad 6 Press OK to save the selection 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode AS ga Changing the clock mode CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only You can set your machine to print out the time on your fax using either a 12 hour or 24 hour format 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Basic setup 1 3 Press the left right arrow until Machine Setup appears and press OK 4 4 Press the left right arrow until Clock Mode appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow to select the 12 hour or 24 hour clock format and press OK 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Changing the default mode 2 CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only a Your machine is preset to Copy mode You can switch this default mode T between Fax mode and Copy mode 1 Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Default Mode appears and press OK Press the left righ
58. press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Sound Volume appears and press OK The setting options may differ according to your model Check your machine has a handset you can adjust the volume level using the Press the left right arrow until Sound Volume appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the sound option you want appear and press OK Key Sound you can select On or Off eAlarm Sound you can select On or Off eSpeaker you can select Comm On or Off eRinger you can select High Mid Low or Off Press the left right arrow until the desired status or volume for the sound you have selected appears and press OK If necessary repeat steps 4 through 5 to set other sounds Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Speaker volume CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only To adjust the volume using On Hook Dial Press Ss Fax on the control panel Press On Hook Dial A dial tone sounds from the speaker Press the left right arrow until you hear the volume you want Press On Hook Dial to save the change and return to ready mode Entering characters te Bada number keypad CLX 3185FN CLX 3185F only to 1 3 As you perform various tasks you may need to enter names and numbers For example when you set up your machine you enter your name or your company s name and the fax number Entering alphanumeric characters When you are prompted to enter a letter locate the button labeled with the character
59. results This may be the result of the sheets characteristics improper handling unacceptable temperature and humidity levels or other variables over which cannot be controlled Before purchasing large quantities of print media ensure that it meets the requirements specified in this user s guide A eUsing print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems or require repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s warranty or service agreements The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used See Print media specifications on page 3 Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine It could cause damage to the machine eUsing inflammable print media can cause a fire Use designated print media See Print media specifications on page 3 A The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may lead to overheating of the unit and in rare cases may cause a fire Media sizes supported in each mode Mode Size Source Copy mode Letter A4 Legal Tray 1 Oficio US Folio Executive JIS B5 A5 A6 Print mode All sizes supported by Tray 1 the machine Manual feeding in the tray Fax mode All sizes supported by Tray 1 the machine Changing the tray size for print media To load longer sizes of paper such as Legal sized paper you need to adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray To change the tray size to o
60. sized media postcard and heavy paper Create professional documents e Print Posters The text and pictures of each page of your document are magpnified and printed across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster See Printing posters on page 3 e Print Watermarks You can customize your documents with words such as Confidential See Using watermarks on page 4 e You can use preprinted or letterhead paper See Using overlay on page 5 Save time and money e To save paper you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper See Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper on page 3 e This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use e To save paper you can print on both sides of the paper manual See Printing on both sides of the paper Manual on page 3 Print in various environments e You can print with various operating systems such as Windows Linux and Macintosh operating systems See System requirements on page 2 e Your machine is equipped with Hi Speed USB 2 0 interface and network interface e Your machine is equipped with wireless network interface CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WkK only Copy originals in several formats e Your machine can copy multiple image copies from the original document on a single page See 2 up or 4 up copying N up on page 2 e There are special functions to erase
61. telephone network by means of a standard modular jack USOC RJ 11C Regulatory information_ 5 Replacing the Fitted Plug for UK Only Important The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard BS 1363 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse When you change or examine the fuse you must re fit the correct 13 amp fuse You then need to replace the fuse cover If you have lost the fuse cover do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover Contact the people from you purchased the machine The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable However some buildings mainly old ones do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor Do not remove the moulded plug A If you cut off the moulded plug get rid of it straight away You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket Important warning e You must earth this machine The wires in the mains lead have the following color code e Green and Yellow Earth e Blue Neutral e Brown Live If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug do the following You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter E or by the safety Earth symbol or colored green and yellow or green You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter N or colored black You must connect the brown w
62. the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password Getting started_ 4 iY You must log in as a super user root to install the machine software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator 3 From the Samsung website download and unpack the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer 4 Click i at the bottom of the desktop When the Terminal screen appears type in the following root localhost root tar zxf FilePath UnifiedLinuxDriver tar gz root localhost root cd FilePath cdroot Linux root localhost Linux install sh iY If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to install the software you have to use the driver in the text mode Follow the steps 3 to 4 and then follow the instructions on the terminal screen 5 When the welcome screen appears click Next 6 When the installation is complete click Finish The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience If you have any difficulties consult the on screen help that is available through your system menu or from the driver package Windows applications such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image Manager Installing the SmartPanel 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 When the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login
63. the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP check if DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window However if it shows Static click Change TCP IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically DHCP eFor the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static check if Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window However if it shows DHCP click Change TCP IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine Example If computer s network information is as below IP address 169 254 133 42 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Machine s network information should be as below IP address 169 254 133 43 Use the computer s IP address with changed last three digits Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Use the computer s subnet mask Gateway 169 254 133 1 Change the last three digits from IP address of your machine to 1 9 When the wireless network setting is completed disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine Click Next IZ If the Change PC Network Setting window appears follow the steps on the window Click Next if you are finished the computer s wireless network settings Wireless network setup CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only 5 If you set the computer s wireless network as DHCP it will take several minutes to receive the IP address 10 The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears Select Yes if you acce
64. the left right arrow until Gray Enhance appears and press OK Press the left right arrow to select On or Off Press OK to save the selection Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode o MI ao NO Deciding the form of copy output You can set the machine to sort the copy job For example if you make 2 copies of a 3 page original one complete 3 page document will print followed by a second complete document 1 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ For CLX 3185 and CLX 3185N place a single original document facing down on the scanner glass and press Menu on the control panel For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW place original documents facing up in the document feeder or you can use the scanner glass with a single document facing down and close the scanner lid Press DS Copy and Menu in order on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until Copy Setup appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Change Default appears and press OK Copying 3 N Press the left right arrow until Copy Collation appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until On appears and press OK to save the selection On Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals 1 1 1 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Enter the number of copies using the left right arrow
65. the paper loaded in the machine Turn on this feature if you want to automatically reduce an incoming page With this feature set to Off the machine cannot reduce the original to fit onto one page The original will be divided and printed in actual size on two or more pages Discard Size When receiving a fax containing pages as long as or longer than the paper in your machine you can set the machine to discard a specific length from the end of the received fax The machine will print the received fax on one or more sheets of paper minus the data that would have been on the specified discard segment When the received fax contains pages larger than the paper in your machine and Auto Reduction has been turned on the machine will reduce the fax to fit on the existing paper and nothing will be discarded Junk Fax Setup This setting may not be available depending on your country Using this feature the system will not accept faxes sent from remote stations whose numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax numbers This feature is useful for blocking any unwanted faxes When you turn on this feature you can access the following options to set junk fax numbers e Add Allows you to set up to 10 fax numbers e Delete Allows you to delete the desired junk fax number If you select Delete All it allows you to delete all junk fax numbers DRPD Mode This mode enables a user to use a single telephone line to a
66. the scanner lid Maintenance_ 3 Storing the toner cartridge Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light temperature and humidity Samsung suggests users follow the recommendations to ensure the optimum performance highest quality and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge Store this cartridge in the same environment in which the printer will be used This should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions The toner cartridge should remain in its original and unopened package until installation If original packaging is not available cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life Do not store on the floor If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer follow the instruction below to store the toner cartridge properly e Store the cartridge inside the protective bag from the original package e Store lying flat not standing on end with the same side facing up as if it was installed in the machine e Do not store consumable in any of the following conditions Temperature greater than 40 C 104 F Humidity range less than 20 and not greater than 80 An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature Direct sunlight or room light Dusty places A car for a long period of time An environment where corrosive gases are pr
67. then click Login e Using the Smart Panel program e SmarThru e Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password ID admin ePassword sec00000 SyncThru Web Service overview A Information Settings Security Maintenance Some tabs may not appear depending on your model Information tab This tab gives you general information about your machine You can check things such as remaining amount of toner You can also print reports such as an error report and so on eActive Alerts This item allows you to check the alerts occurred in the machine and their severity eSupplies This item allows you to check how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in the cartridge Usage Counters This item allows you to check the usage count by print types simplex duplex eCurrent Settings This item allows you to check the machine and network information ePrint information This item allows you to print reports such as system related reports e mail address and font reports Settings tab This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and network You need to log in as an administrator to view this tab Machine Settings tab This tab allows you to set options provided by your machine System You can set settings related to your machine Printer You can set settings related to printing jobs
68. this window you can view the list of available ports check the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has terminated the pi for any reason oec pO Aevinip Mdoamip Cdovmipa Bs FFB FS EE emis ewmips idewmip7 a a a L drip idovwimip doemip10 Adewnntpt 1 Por la ur Switches to Ports configuration SIS Shows all of the available ports Refresh Renews the available ports list Release port Releases the selected port Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners Your machine may be connected to a host computer via a parallel port or USB port Since the machine device contains more than one device printer and scanner it is necessary to organize proper access of consumer applications to these devices via the single I O port The Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner drivers The drivers talk to their devices via so called machine ports The current status of any machine port can be viewed via the Ports configuration The port sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of the machine device while another block is in use When you install a new machine device onto your system it is strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an Unified Driver Configurator In this case you will be asked to choose I O port for the new device
69. toner cartridge on page 2 Replace new Fuser unit The fuser unit has almost reached its estimated life Replace the fuser unit with a new one See Available maintenance parts on page 1 Replace IMG unit y The imaging unit has almost reached its estimated life Replace the imaging unit with a new one See Replacing the imaging unit on page 3 Troubleshooting_ 7 Message Meaning Suggested solutions Self Diagnostics Please wait The engine in your printer is checking some problems detected Please wait a few minutes Toner Supply Err vy The machine cannot detect a toner cartridge Remove the toner hopper sheet from the toner cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 Or open and close the front door If the problem persists turn the power button off and on Too many Faxes Remove Job Too many faxes are received Remove received faxes Solving other problems The following chart lists some trouble conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected If the problem persists contact a service representative Other problems include e See Power problems on page 8 e See Paper feeding problems on page 9 e See Printing problems on page 10 e See Printing quality problems on page 11 e See Copying problems on page 14 e See Scannin
70. used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address TCP IP The Transmission Control Protocol TCP and the Internet Protocol IP the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run TCR Transmission Confirmation Report TCR provides details of each transmission such as job status transmission result and number of pages sent This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions TIFF Tagged Image File Format TIFF is a variable resolution bitmapped image format TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners TIFF images make use of tags keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file This flexible and platform independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains toner Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers which forms the text and images on the printed paper Toner can be fused by by a combination of heat pressure from the fuser causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with a TWAIN compliant program a scan can be initiated from
71. with the email addresses you use frequently via SyncThru Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book Registering speed email numbers 1 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access SyncThru Web Service of your machine 2 Click Address Book on the menu tab in the top of the website 3 The Individual Address Book page appears on the middle pane of the website 4 Click Add to enter the contact information you want to register 5 The Add windows appears Enter the contact information such as Name E mail address and Fax Number Also you can specify the Speed No 6 Click Apply l4 You can also import and export your address book via SyncThru Web Service Grouping addresses in Groups Address Book 1 Turn your network connected computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Example http 123 123 123 123 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service l4 If necessary you can change the language in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login on the upper right of the website The Login window appears 5 Type in the ID and Password and then click Login If it is your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password Scanning_ 3 ID admin Password sec
72. within the program It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention UNC is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products The format of a UNC path is lt servername gt lt sharename gt lt Additional directory gt Glossary_ 5 URL Uniform Resource Locator URL is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located USB Universal Serial Bus USB is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum Inc to connect computers and peripherals Unlike the parallel port USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna Italy in 1282 they have been used by papermakers to identify their product and also on postage stamps currency and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802 11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one e
73. 00000 l4 If you do not use the SyncThru Web Service for five minutes it automatically gets logged out 6 Click Address Book on the top of menu bar Click E mail Groups Click Add Group Then the Add window appears Enter the group name you want in the Group Name input area Specify the Speed No from the drop down list 10 Select Add individual s after this group is created check box bali aia l4 If you do not want to add individual addresses to the group address you made skip this step You can add individual addresses next time 11 Click Apply Then the Add window appears 12 Check the addresses you want to add to E mail Group Address Book from the Individual Address Book 13 Click the arrow in the middle The selected addresses are added in E mail Group Address Book 14 Click Apply Using Address Book entries Speed email numbers When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an email enter the speed email number at which you stored the address you want eFor a one digit speed email location press and hold the corresponding digit button from the number keypad eFor a two or three digit speed email location press the first digit button s and then hold down the last digit button You can search through memory for an entry by pressing Address Book See Searching Address Book for an entry on page 4 Group email numbers To use a group email entry you need to search for and
74. 168 1 150 Network setup CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only 2 enter 192 168 1 X X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer s address Subnet Mask Enter a Subnet Mask eDefault Gateway Enter a Default Gateway 6 Click Apply and then click OK The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report Confirm that all the settings are correct 7 Click Exit to close the SetIP program 8 If necessary restart the computer s firewall IPv4 setting using SetIP Program Macintosh For using SetIP program disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following 1 Open System Preferences 2 Click Security 3 Click the Firewall menu 4 Turn firewall off The following instructions may vary from your model 1 Connect your machine to the network with a network cable 2 Insert the Installation CD ROM and open the disk window select MAC Installer gt MAC Printer gt SetIP gt SetlPapplet html 3 Double click the file and Safari will automatically open then select Trust The browser will open the SetlPapplet html page that shows the printer s name and IP address information 4 Highlight the printer information row and select the Setup icon which is the second icon from the left in the application menu bar A TCP IP Configuration window will open iY If the printer was not shown in the information row select the Manual Setting icon third from left to open the T
75. 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only on page 1 e Using the Smart Panel program on page 2 e SmarThru on page 3 e Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator on page 3 Using SyncThru Web Service orga pon LX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185 only K Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for SyncThru Web Service If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP IP network parameters correctly you can manage the machine via SyncThru Web Service an embedded web server Use SyncThru Web Service to e View the machine s device information and check its current status e Change TCP IP parameters and set up other network parameters e Change printer preference e Set the email notifications advising of the machine s status e Get support for using the machine To access SyncThru Web Service 1 Access a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go 2 Your machine s embedded website opens Logging into SyncThru Web Service Before configuring options in SyncThru Web Service you need to log in as an administrator You can still use SyncThru Web Service without logging in but you won t have access to Settings tab and Security tab 1 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website A log in page appears 2 Type in the ID and Password
76. 5N CLX 3185WK Front view This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model 1 Scanner lid 5 Front door 9 Waste toner container 2 USB port 5 Output support Imaging unit 3 Tray 1 Control panel 11 Scanner glass 4 Front door handle Toner cartridges 12 Scan unit a CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK only Introduction_ 1 Rear view This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model 1 Rear door handle 4 USB port 2 Rear door 5 Network port 3 Power cord receptacle a CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK only Introduction_ 2 Control panel overview CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model iK Power Allows you to turn the power on and off See Power button on page 8 Eco Copy Reduces toner consumption and paper usage See Eco Copy button CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN only on page 8 Direct USB CLX 3185WK Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB memory port on the front of your machine See Using USB memory device CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FW only on page 1 ID Copy Allows you to coy both sides the ID card like a driver s license to a single side of paper See ID card copying on page 2 Display Shows the current status and prom
77. AN Standards Committee IEEE 802 802 1 1b g n 802 11b g n can share same hardware and use the 2 4 GHz band 802 11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps 802 11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps 802 11b g n devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens cordless telephones and Bluetooth devices Access point Access Point or Wireless Access Point AP or WAP is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks WLAN and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals ADF An Automatic Document Feeder ADF is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple Inc for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors As the number of bits increases the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map 1 bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem GDI and used commonly as a simple
78. B Press the left right arrow until File Manage appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Format appears and press OK Press OK when Yes appears to confirm your selection Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Pawn Viewing the USB memory status You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and saving documents 1 Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Press Direct USB 3 Press the left right arrow until Check Space appears and press OK 4 The available memory space appears on the display Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Using USB memory device CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FW only _ 3 machine status and advanced feature This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine and the method of setting for the advanced machine setup Read this chapter carefully in order to use your machine s diverse features This chapter includes e Fax setup CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only e Copy setup e Printing a report Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Fax setup CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only e Clearing memory e Network CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only e Menu overview Option Description Changing the fax setup options Your machine provides you with various user selectable options for setting up the fax system You
79. CLX 318x Series imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product Contents ma ob md md O O OO O O M0 AAD OB PW a Oona krBRWWWONMNDND COPYRIGHT Safety information Regulatory information About this user s guide Features of your new product INTRODUCTION Machine overview CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK Front view Control panel overview CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK Machine overview CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW Front view Rear view Control panel overview CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW Understanding the Status LED Introducing the useful buttons Menu button Power button Print screen button CLX 3185 only Eco Copy button CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN only WPS button CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FW only Acknowledging the status of the toner cartridge GETTING STARTED Setting up the hardware Supplied software System requirements Microsoft Windows Macintosh Linux Installing USB connected machine s driver Windows Macintosh Linux Sharing your machine locally Windows Macintosh NETWORK SETUP CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW ONLY DOO OD AAO O ODWONN 3 DH Od DNNNN NN NS SS AO O CO OO 00 N 10 10 10 10 Network environment Introducing useful network programs SyncThru Web Service SyncThru Web Admin Service SetIP Using a wired network Printing a network configuration report Setting IP address Network parameter setting Restoring factory default
80. CP IP Configuration window 5 Enter the machine s new information into the configuration window as follows In a corporate intranet you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding eMAC Address Find the machine s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons For example 00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes 0015992951A8 eIP Address Enter a new IP address for your printer For example if your computer s IP address is 192 168 1 150 enter 192 168 1 X X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer s address Subnet Mask Enter a Subnet Mask eDefault Gateway Enter a Default Gateway 6 Select Apply then OK and OK again The printer will automatically print the configuration report Confirm that all the settings are correct Quit Safari You may close and eject the installation CD ROM If necessary restart the computer s firewall You have successfully changed the IP address subnet mask and gateway IPv4 setting using SetIP Program Linux SetiIP program should be automatically installed during the printer driver installation 1 Print the machine s network configuration report to find your machine s MAC address 2 Open the opt Samsung mfp share utils 3 Double click the SetIPApplet htmi file 4 Click to open the TCP IP configuration window 5 Enter the network card s MAC address IP address subnet mask default gateway and then click Apply
81. Color prints two original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of paper in color mode 4up Color prints four original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of paper in color mode 6 Press OK to save the selection 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode WPS button CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FW only Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS is a standard for easy and secure establishment of a wireless network This function simplifies the process of configuring the wireless network connection and security options The WPS button enables you to setup the wireless network configuration easily This function simplifies the process of configuring the wireless network options such as a network name SSID data encryption and authentication You can complete the wireless connection settings by just pressing this button To perform this function refer to Wireless network setup CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only on page 1 gt Acknowledging the status of the toner cartridge The status of toner cartridges is indicated by the Status LED and the LCD display If the toner cartridge is low or needs to be replaced the Status LED turns red and the display shows the message However the arrow mark shows which color toner is of concern or may be installed with a new cartridge Example The above example shows the yellow cartridge status indicated by the arrow Check the message to find out what the problem is and how to solve it See Understanding dis
82. Control windows elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Yes in the User Account Control window 3 Select Install Now eameunad 7 Install Now O F View User s Guide p gt w Wireless Setting and Installation p gt O Advanced Installation Installation Language English If necessary select a language from the drop down list of Installation Language l4 The Advanced installation has two options Custom Installation and Install Software Only The Custom Installation allows you to select the machine s connection and choose individual component to install The Install Software Only allows you to install the supplied software such as Smart Panel Follow the guide in the window 4 Read License Agreement and select accept the terms of the License Agreement Then click Next License Agreement Please read the License Agreement License Language English END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS SOFTWARE PRODUCT IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This Samsung Electronics End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and Samsung Electronics Co Lid SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS with respect to the SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS product identified above The SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS software product may include associated software components media printed mater
83. DHCP server continually asks to assign the IP address Message Meaning Suggested solutions Not Compatible color toner The toner cartridge is not suitable for your machine Install the corresponding toner cartridge with a Samsung genuine cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 DHCP problem Reconfigure BOOTP The IP address assignment is failed This happens when Auto IP for DHCP is not set SyncThru Web Service Change the IP address assignment method to BOOTP or Static If you do not change this option the DHCP server continually asks to assign the IP address Not installed The waste toner Install the waste toner Document Jam Remove Jam The loaded original document has jammed in the ADF Clear the jam See Clearing original document jams CLX 3185FN CLX 3185 FW only on page 2 Waste tank container is not container installed Not original The toner cartridge is Install the corresponding color toner not a Samsung genuine toner cartridge toner cartridge with a Samsung genuine cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 Output bin full Remove media The output tray is full Or the sensor is not Remove papers from the output tray the machine Door Open Close it The front door is not securely latched Close the door until it locks into place Error error number Call for service A syste
84. Displays the number of pages scanned by using scanner glass eImaging Unit Transfer Belt Fuser TransferRoller Tray1 Roller Displays the number of pages printed by each item 6 If you selected to print a supply information page press OK to confirm 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode eS YS Tips for moving amp storing your machine e When moving the machine do not tilt or turn it upside down Otherwise the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner which can cause damage to the machine or reduce print quality e When moving the machine make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely Maintenance_ 4 troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error This chapter includes e Redistributing toner e Tips for avoiding paper jams e Clearing original document jams CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Redistributing toner When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life e White streaks or light printing occurs e Prepare toner appears on the display e The Status LED blinks red If this happens you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge In some cases white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner 1 Using the handle completely open the front door A pa NG AZ NAG 2 Grasp the handles on the toner cartridg
85. E mail Notification You can set e mail notification feature and e mail address of recipients who will receive the notification Network Settings tab This tab allows you to view and change the network environment You can set things such as TCP IP network protocols and so on SNMP You can exchange of management information between network devices using SNMP Outgoing Mail Server SMTP You can set the outgoing e mail server Restore Default You can restore default network settings Security tab This tab allows you to set system and network security information You need to log in as an administrator to view this tab Management tools 1 System Security You can set the system administrator s information and also enable or disable machine features Network Security You can set settings for HTTPs IPSec IPv4 IPv6 filtering 802 1x Authentication servers Maintenance tab This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and setting contact information for sending emails You can also connect to Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu Firmware Upgrade You can upgrade your machine s firmware Contact Information You can view the contact information eLink You can view the links to useful sites where you can download or check information E mail notification setup You can receive emails about your machine s status by setting this option By setting information such as IP add
86. For example you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document A gt There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine They can be modified or you can add new ones to the list Using an existing watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Advanced tab and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop down list You will see the selected watermark in the preview image 3 Click OK or Print until you exit the print window Creating a watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 From the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears 3 Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box You can enter up to 256 characters The message displays in the preview window When the First Page Only box is checked the watermark prints on the first page only 4 Select watermark options You can select the font name style size and shade from the Font Attributes section as well as set the angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section 5 Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list 6 When you have fi
87. M cyan C and black K The status LED and the toner related message on the display indicate which toner cartridge should be replaced At this stage the indicated toner cartridge needs to be replaced Before replacing the toner cartridge check the model number for the toner cartridge used in your machine l4 Click this link to open an animation about replacing the toner cartridge 1 Turn the machine off then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool 2 Using the handle completely open the front door 3 Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the cartridge from the machine 4 Take a new toner cartridge out of its package A Don t use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package You could damage the surface of the toner cartridge 5 Pull out the hopper sheet from a new toner cartridge 6 Holding both handles on the toner cartridge thoroughly rock it from side to side to evenly distribute the toner 7 Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface as shown below and remove the protecting cap Supplies and accessories_ 2 A If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash it in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 8 Make sure that the color of the toner cartridge matches the color slot and then grasp the handles on the toner cartridge Insert the cartridge until it clicks into place 9 Close the front door
88. M icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop 5 Double click the MAC_Installer folder 6 Double click the Installer OS X icon 7 Enter the password and click OK 8 The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue 9 Read the license agreement and click Continue 10 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement 11 Select Easy Install and click Install Easy Install is recommended for most users All components necessary for machine operations will be installed If you select Custom Install you can choose individual components to install 12 When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears click Continue 13 Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option and then click OK 14 The software searches the wireless network IZ If the searching has failed you may check if the USB cable is connected between the computer and machine properly and follow the instruction on the window 15 After searching the window shows the wireless network devices Select the name SSID of access point you are using and click Next IZ If you cannot find out the network name you want to choose or if you want to set the wireless configuration manually click Advanced Setting Enter the wireless Network Name Type the SSID of access point you want SSID is case sensitive Operation Mode Select Infrastructure eAuthentication Select an authentication type Open System Authentication is not use
89. MB or larger for working with large scanned images The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at maximum Installing USB connected machine s driver A locally connected machine is a machine directly connected to your computer by a USB cable if Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 m 10 ft Windows You can install the machine software using the typical or custom method The following steps are recommended for most users who use a machine directly connected to your computer All components necessary for machine operations will be installed 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on IZ If the Found New Hardware Wizard appears during the installation procedure click Cancel to close the window 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive The software CD should automatically run and an installation window will appear elf the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive Click OK elf you use Windows Vista Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start gt All programs gt Accessories gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive and click OK elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account
90. MSUNG 172678 022 607 93 33 www samsung com PORTUGAL 80820 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com PUERTO RICO 1 800 682 3180 www samsung com QATAR 800 2255 REP DOMINICA 1 800 751 2676 www samsung com RUSSIA 8 800 555 55 55 www samsung ru SINGAPORE 1800 SAMSUNG www samsung com 726 7864 SLOVAKIA 0800 SAMSUNG www samsung com 726 7864 SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG www samsung com 726 7864 SPAIN 902 1 SAMSUNG 902 172 www samsung com 678 SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 www samsung com SAMSUNG SWITZERLAND 0848 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com CHF 0 08 min SYRIA 1825 22 73 TADJIKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 TAIWAN 0800 329 999 www samsung com THAILAND 1800 29 3232 www samsung com 022 689 3232 TRINIDAD amp 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com TOBAGO 726 7864 TURKEY 444 77 11 www samsung com U A E 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com U K 0845 SAMSUNG www samsung com 726 7864 U S A 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com 726 7864 UKRAINE 8 800 502 000 www samsung ua www samsung com ua_ru Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 2 olossary The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user s guide 802 11 802 11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network WLAN communication developed by the IEEE LAN M
91. Mode appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until DRPD appears and press OK Waiting Ring appears on the display 7 Call your fax number from another telephone It is not necessary to place the call from a fax machine 8 When your machine begins to ring do not answer the call The machine requires several rings to learn the pattern When the machine completes learning the display shows Completed DRPD Setup If the DRPD setup fails Error DRPD Ring appears Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 6 2 2 ae BO i DRPD must be set up again if you re assign your fax number or connect the machine to another telephone line eAfter DRPD has been set up call your fax number again to verify that the machine answers with a fax tone Then have a call placed to a different number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is forwarded to the extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket Receiving in secure receiving mode You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended In secure receiving mode all incoming faxes go into memory When the mode is deactivated any stored faxes are printed Activating secure receiving mode Press As Fax on the control panel 3S Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until Fax Featur
92. N Reduces toner consumption and paper usage See Eco Copy button CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN only on page 8 Direct USB CLX 3185FW Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB memory port on the front of your machine See Using USB memory device CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FW only on page 1 ID Copy Allows you to coy both sides the ID card like a driver s license to a single side of paper See ID card copying on page 2 Display Shows the current status and prompts during an operation Copy Activates Copy mode Fax Activates Fax mode Left Right Arrow Scrolls through the options available in the selected menu and increases or decreases values Menu Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus See Menu overview on page 4 OK Confirms the selection on the screen Number Keypad Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters See Entering characters using the number keypad CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only on page 2 Address Book Allows you to search for stored email addresses Redial Pause Redials the last number in ready mode or inserts a pause into a fax number in Edit mode Black Start Begins a printing job in black and white mode Stop Clear Stops an operations at any time In ready mode clears cancels the copy options such as the darkness the document type setting the copy siz
93. PCL is a Page Description Language PDL developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard Originally developed for early inkjet printers PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal dot matrix printer and laser printers PDF Portable Document Format PDF is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format Glossary_ 4 PostScript PostScript PS is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas that is run in an interpreter to generate an image Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer Print Media The media like paper envelopes labels and transparencies which can be used in a printer a scanner a fax or a copier PPM Pages Per Minute PPM is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute PRN file An interface for a device driver this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input output system calls which simplifies many tasks Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection communication and data transfer between two computing endpoints PS See PostScript PSTN The Public Switched Telephone Network
94. Printer Name list and click Create When the confirmation window appears click OK 21 Click Continue on the Read Me window 22 After the installation is finished click Restart Setting a wireless network with network cable Your machine is a network compatible machine To enable your machine to work with your network you will need to perform some configuration procedures if Refer to your network administrator or the person that set up your wireless network for information about your network configuration Preparing items Ensure you have next items ready e Access point e Network connected computer e Software CD that provided with your machine e Wireless network printer your machine e Network cable Setting IP address First you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server located on the network In a few situations the IP address must be set manually This is called a static IP and is often required in a corporate Intranets for security reasons e DHCP IP assignment Connect your machine to the network and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the machine Then print the Network Configuration Report as explained above If the report shows that the IP address has changed the assignment was successful You will see the new IP address in the rep
95. Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive FAX This Samsung product has been self certified by Samsung for pan European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network PSTN in accordance with Directive 1999 5 EC The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European countries In the event of problems you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd in the first instance The product has been tested against TBR21 To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard the European Telecommunication Standards Institute ETSI has issued an advisory document EG 201 121 which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals The product has been designed against and is fully compliant with all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document European Radio Approval Information for products fitted with EU approved radio devices Low power Radio LAN type devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz band may be present embedded in your printer system which is intended for home or office use This section is only applicable if these devices are present Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European U
96. The International Organization for Standardization ISO is an international standard setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies It produces world wide industrial and commercial standards ITU T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications Its main tasks include standardization allocation of the radio spectrum and organizing interconnection Glossary_ 3 arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls A T out of ITU T indicates telecommunication ITU T No 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU T for document facsimile transmissions JBIG Joint Bi level Image Experts Group JBIG is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality which was designed for compression of binary images particularly for faxes but can also be used on other images JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP IP LED A Light Emitting Diode LED is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine MAC address Media
97. Using help e Using special print features The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows XP Introducing useful software program Samsung AnyWeb Print This tool helps you to screen capture preview scrap and print the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the ordinary program Click Start 5 All programs 5 Samsung Printers 5 Samsung AnyWeb Print 5 Download the latest version to link the website where the tool is available for the download This tool is available only for Windows operating systems Samsung Easy Color Manager This program helps users to adjust color as they like Users can adjust the printout color as they see them on the monitor The adjusted color can be stored on the printer driver and applied to printouts Click Start 5 All programs gt Samsung Printers gt Samsung Easy Color Manager gt Download the latest version to link the website where the tool is available for the download This tool is available only for Windows and Macintosh operating systems Printer driver features Your printer drivers support the following standard features e Paper orientation size source and media type selection e Number of copies In addition you can use various special printing features The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer drivers Some models or operating systems may not support some of the feature s in the following table
98. a in the memory Option Description Receiving Redial Times You can specify the number of redial attempts If you enter O the machine will not redial Option Description Receive Mode You can select the default fax receiving mode For details on receiving faxes in each mode see Changing the receive modes on page 4 Redial Term Your machine can automatically redial a remote fax machine if it was busy You can set an interval between attempts Prefix Dial You can set a prefix of up to five digits This number dials before any automatic dial number is started It is useful for accessing a PABX exchange Ring To Answer You can specify the number of times the machine rings before answering an incoming call Stamp RCV Name This option allows the machine to automatically print the page number and the date and time of reception at the bottom of each page of a received fax RCV Start Code This code allows you to initiate fax reception from an extension phone plugged into the EXT socket on the back of the machine If you pick up the extension phone and hear fax tones enter the code It is preset to 9 at the factory Machine status and advanced feature_ 1 Option Description Auto Reduction When receiving a fax containing pages as long as or longer than the paper loaded in the paper tray the machine can reduce the size of the original to fit the size of
99. a wireless network to connect to the machine with either a USB cable or a network cable For most users we recommend using a USB cable with the program provided in the supplied software CD The following are two ways to install a wireless network with cables e With a USB cable You can simply set up a wireless network using the program in the supplied software CD Only Windows and Macintosh operating system are supported See Setting a wireless network with USB cable on page 3 i You can also install a wireless network in Printer Settings Utility with a USB cable after installing driver Windows and Macintosh operating system are supported e With a network cable You can set up a wireless network using the SyncThru Web Service program See Setting a wireless network with network cable on page 8 Setting a wireless network with WPS button on the control panel If your machine and an access point or wireless router support Wi Fi Protected Setup M WPS you can easily configure the wireless network settings by pressing the WPS O button on the control panel Items to prepare You need to ensure you have the following items ready to use e Check if the access point or wireless router supports Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS e Check if your machine supports Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Choosing your network connection There are two methods to connect your machine to a wireless network by using the WPS O b
100. ach time they want to print using other settings 1 Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print 2 Open the File menu and click Print 3 Go to Paper Feed pane 4 Set appropriate tray from which you want to print 5 Go to Paper pane 6 Set paper type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print 7 Click Print to print Linux 1 Open Terminal Program 2 When the Terminal screen appears type in the following root localhost root lor lt FileName gt 3 Select Printer and click Properties 4 Click on the Advanced tab 5 Select the tray Source and its options such as paper size and type 6 Press OK Basic setup_ 3 Setting job timeout You can set the time the machine waits before it restores the default copy settings if you do not start copying after changing them on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Machine Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Timeout appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the time setting you want appears Selecting Off means that the machine dose not restore the default settings until you press Black Start or Color Start to begin copying or Stop Clear to cancel 6 Press OK to save the selection 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Soe DOES Setting the humidity mode
101. achine and wireless access point or wireless router are not separated by poles walls or support columns containing metal or concrete e The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may interfere with the wireless signal Wireless network setup CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only 11 basic setup After installation is complete you may want to set the machine s default settings Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the machine This chapter includes e Altitude adjustment e Changing the display language e Setting the date and time CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only e Changing the clock mode CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only e Changing the default mode CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only e Setting sounds Altitude adjustment The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of print Before you set the altitude value determine the altitude where you are 1 High 3 2 High 2 3 High 1 4 Normal 1 Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided Printer Software CD 2 Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar or Notification Area in Linux You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in
102. acing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive and click OK elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control windows 4 Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option 5 Read the License Agreement and select accept the terms of the License Agreement Then click Next 6 The software searches the wireless network iY If the software has failed to search the network check if the USB cable is connected properly between the computer and machine and follow the instruction on the window 7 After searching the wireless network a list of wireless network your machine has searched appears If you want to use the Samsung default ad hoc setting select the last wireless network on the list which Network Name SSID is portthru and Signal is Printer Self Network Then click Next If you want to use other ad hoc settings select other wireless network from the list iY If you cannot find out the network name you want to choose or if you want to set the ad hoc configuration manually click Advanced Setting Enter the wireless Network Name Type in the SSID name you want SSID is case sensitive Operation Mode Select Ad hoc Channel Select the channel eAuthentication Select an authentication type Open System Authentication is not used and encryption may or may not
103. ages Original Type You can improve the copy quality by selecting the document type for the current copy job Eco Copy You can cut toner consumption and paper usage by using this option Printing a report You can print a report on the machine s configuration or font list etc 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Report appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the report or list you want to print appears and press OK To print all reports and lists select All Report 5 Press OK when Yes appears to confirm printing The selected information prints out Option Description All Report You can print reports and lists about all options Configuration This list shows the status of the user selectable options You may print this list to confirm your changes after changing settings Supplies Info This list shows the current status of consumables in your machine Address Book This list shows all of the fax numbers currently stored in the machine s memory Send Report This report shows the fax number the number of pages the elapsed time of the job the communication mode and the communication results for a particular fax job You can set up your machine to automatically print a transmission confirmation report after each fax job See Sending on page 1 Opti
104. aining in each toner cartridge and various other types of information You can also change settings S yey D Ser ies USB i 01 x Ready Buy Now Cy User s Guide 3 Black M lt a gt rinter Settin Cyan pm 2 ae Magenta mmm nm Yellow Cggower Setting 5 Toner Level You can view the level of toner remaining in each toner cartridge The machine and the number of toner cartridge s shown in the above window may differ depending on the machine in use Some machines do not have this feature Buy Now You can order replacement toner cartridge s from online User s Guide You can view the online User s Guide This button changes to Troubleshooting Guide when error occurs You can directly open the troubleshooting section in the user s guide Printer You can configure various machine settings in the Setting Printer Settings Utility window Some machines do not have this feature 4 fH If you connect your machine to a network the SyncThru Web Service window appears instead of the Printer Settings Utility window Driver Setting You can set all of the machine options you need in the Printing Preferences window This feature is 5 available only for Windows See Opening printing preferences on page 2 Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings Right click in Windows or Linux the Smart Panel icon and select Options Select the s
105. ake a copy However if you want to change the options for each copy use the copy function buttons on the control panel Z If you press Stop Clear while setting the copy options all of the options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and returned to their default status Or they will automatically return to their default status after the machine completes the copy in progress e ID card copying e Using special copy features e Deciding the form of copy output Darkness If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images you can adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read 1 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ For CLX 3185 and CLX 3185N press Menu on the control panel For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW press 9 Copy and Menu in order on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Darkness appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the contrast mode you want appears and press OK eLightest Works well with lightest print eLight Works well with light print Normal Works well with standard typed or printed originals eDark Works well with dark print eDarkest Works well with darkest print 5 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode gad Original Type The original type setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the document type for the current c
106. al Services is compatible with your machine a Allows you to edit a scanned image in various ways using a powerful image editor and to send the image by email You can also open another image editor program such as Adobe Photoshop from SmarThru For details refer to the on screen help supplied on the SmarThru program See SmarThru on page 3 System requirements Before you begin ensure that your system meets the following requirements Macintosh Requirements recommended OPERATING SYSTEM CPU RAM free HDD space Mac OS X Intel e 128 MB for a 1 GB 10 3 10 4 Processors PowerPC based PowerPC G4 Mac 512 MB G5 e 512 MB fora Intel based Mac 1 GB Mac OS X Intel 512 MB 1 GB 1 GB 10 5 Processors 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4 G5 Mac OS X Intel 1 GB 2 GB 1 GB 10 6 Processors Getting started_ 2 Linux Item Requirements Operating Fedora 2 10 32 64 bit system OpenSuSE 9 2 9 3 10 0 10 1 10 2 10 3 11 0 11 1 32 64 bit SuSE Linux 9 1 32 bit Ubuntu 6 06 6 10 7 04 7 10 8 04 8 10 32 64 bit Mandrake 10 0 10 1 32 64 bit Mandriva 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 32 64 bit Debian 3 1 4 0 5 0 32 64 bit Redhat Enterprise Linux WS 4 5 32 64 bit SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9 10 32 64 bit CPU Pentium IV 2 4GHz Intel CoreTM2 RAM 512 MB 1 GB Free HDD space 1 GB 2GB Z elt is necessary to claim swap partition of 300
107. amsung Scan and Fax Manager is also automatically installed on your computer This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection See Using Samsung Scan and Fax Manager on page 4 TWAIN TWAIN is the one of a preset imaging applications Scanning an image launches the selected application enabling you to control the scanning process This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection See Scanning with TWAIN enabled software on page 6 SmarThru This program is the accompanying software for your machine You can use this program to scan images or documents This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection See SmarThru on page 3 WIA WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition To use this feature your computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB cable See Scanning using the WIA driver on page 6 Scanning originals and sending to your computer Scan to PC You can scan an image on the machine via the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program that is installed in your USB or network connected computer scanning_ 1 Setting up Address Book CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Using Samsung Scan and Fax Manager Scanning with TWAIN enabled software Scanning using the WIA driver Macintosh scanning Linux Scanning For USB connected machine This is a basic scanning method for USB connected machine 1 2 Make sure that the mach
108. aning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems 1 Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord Wait for the machine to cool down 2 Using the handle completely open the front door 3 Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove four cartridges from the machine Maintenance_ 1 4 Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using the handle 7 Holding the groove on the front of the imaging unit push imaging unit into the machine 5 Pull the imaging unit out of the machine using the groove on the front of the imaging unit KY Do not touch the green surface of the drum located in the imaging unit Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area 8 Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place N N N x AN 4 Do not touch the green surface of the drum located in the imaging unit Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area 6 With a dry and lint free cloth wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the toner cartridges area and their cavities A ef oi ay a ae eles Mi it aa aha a at cloth and wash 10 Reinstall all the compartments into the machine and close the front door E If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not elf your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner we operate recommend you use a cloth or tis
109. aper the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer Gateway A connection between computer networks or between a computer network and a telephone line It is very popular as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network Grayscale A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale colors are represented by various shades of gray Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots HDD Hard Disk Drive HDD commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk is a non volatile storage device which stores digitally encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE is an international non profit professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE The term 1284 B refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral for example a printer Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols
110. art Note Provides additional information or details for the machine function and feature 19 The date format may differ from country to country Caution Contains information you can use to protect the machine from possible Do not touch the surface of the drum mechanical damage or malfunction located in the toner cartridge or imaging unit Footnote Provides additional information on certain words or a phrase a pages per minute Cross reference Refers you to additional detailed information See Finding more information on page 2 About this user s guide 1 Finding more information You can find information about setting up and using your machine in the following resources either as a print out or on screen Material name Description Quick Installation This guide provides information on setting up your machine This guide is provided in the box with the printer Guide User s Guide This guide provides you with step by step instructions for using your machine s full features maintaining your machine troubleshooting and replacing supplies Machine Driver Help This help provides you with information about the printer driver and instructions for setting up the options for printing See Using help on page 3 Samsung website If you have Internet access you can get help support machine drivers manuals and order information from the Samsung website www samsung com printer Down
111. artridge has probably been scratched Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 If white vertical streaks appear on the page The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU contact a service representative Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page The paper may be too damp Try printing with a fresh ream of paper Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture If background scatter occurs on an envelope change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side Printing on seams can cause problems If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page adjust the print resolution through your software application or the printer properties Troubleshooting 12 Condition Suggested Solutions Condition Suggested Solutions Toner particles are around bold characters or pictures The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper Change the printer option and try again Go to the Printing Preferences click the Paper tab and set the paper type to Recycled Back of printouts are dirty Check for leaking toner Clean the inside of the machine See Cleaning the inside on page 1 Misformed characte
112. ation Destination C3 Add Folder My Documents E Email Y Microsoft Paint ka Ad Application 00 File Format JPEG x Remove Application Scan Property a ater ITD SEC PRINTING setting Save Location C Documents and Settings SEC PrintingiMy Documen 37 Resolution 300 dpi x Scan Color Color Scan Size AA O Show Preview Default f Cancel Apply Scan Destination eAvailable Destination List Shows the list of applications currently linked to scanned images in the PC s registry Select the program you want to use and click the right arrow and add to Front Panel Destination List Front Panel Destination List Shows the list of applications to open scanned image Add Application Allows you to add application you want to use to Available Destination List Remove Application Allows you to remove an item added by the user in the Available Destination List File Format Allows you to select the form of scanned data to be saved You can choose among BMP JPEG PDF and TIFF Scan Property Computer ID Shows the ID of your computer Save Location Allows you to choose the location of the default saving folder Resolution Allows you to choose the scan resolution Scan Color Allows you to choose the scan color Scan Size Allows you to choose the scan size ADF Duplex Automatically scans both sides If your model does not support this option it will be grayed out S
113. ault dynamic host configuration 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until Network appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until TCP IP IPv6 appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until DHCPv6 Config appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow to access the required value DHCPv6 Addr Always use DHCPV6 regardless of router request DHCPv6 Off Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request Router Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router 6 Press OK Manual address configuration 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL 2 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens move the mouse cursor on the Settings of the top menu bar and then click Network Settings 3 Click TCP IPv6 on the left pane of the website 4 Select the Manual Address check box Then the Address Prefix text box is activated 5 Enter the rest of address ex 3FFE 10 88 194 AAAA A is the hexadecimal O through 9 A through F 6 Click the Apply button Using SyncThru Web Service 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL 2 Select one of the IPv6 addresses Link local Address Stateless Address Stateful Address Manual Address from Network Configuration Report See Printing a network configuration report on page 2 3 Enter the IPv6 addresses ex http FE80 215 99FF FE66 7701 A Address must be
114. ax Feature appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Fax appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Send Forward appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until On appears and press OK Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine eo ee O BO ad Forwarding a received fax to another destination With this feature you can forward every fax you received to another destination When the machine receives a fax a fax is stored in the memory then the machine sends it to the destination you have set 1 Press lt amp Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Fax appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Rev Forward appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been completed select Forward amp Print 8 Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent and press OK 9 Enter the starting time using left right arrow or numeric keypad and press OK a ee al 10 Enter the end
115. ay the paper length guide can be pushed to inside load paper enough elf you experience problems with paper feed load a paper into the tray one by one eYou can load previously printed paper The printed side should be facing up with an uncurled edge at the front If you experience problems with paper feed turn the paper around Note that print quality is not guaranteed Media and tray_ 3 The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size depending on your country To change the size to A4 or Letter you must adjust the lever and paper width guide properly 1 Pull the tray out of the machine Open the paper cover and remove paper from the tray if necessary 2 If you want to change the size to Letter turn over the tray and hold the lever at the back and rotate it clockwise l4 If you want to change the size to A4 first move the paper width guide to left and rotate the lever counterclockwise If you force the lever it could damage the tray Loading paper in the tray In the tray 1 Pull out the paper tray And adjust the tray size to the media size you are loading See Changing the tray size for print media on page 2 2 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading the paper 3 Place paper with the side you want to print facing up So K O S 4 Insert the tray back into the machine 5 When you print a document set the paper type and size in the tray For informat
116. ber You can insert a pause while you are setting up speed dial numbers To insert a pause press Redial Pause at the appropriate place while entering the telephone number A appears on the display at the corresponding location Using the save modes Using the power saving feature When you will not be using the machine for a while you can use this feature to save power 1 Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Machine Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Power Save appears and press OK Press the left right arrow to select the time you want Press OK to save the selection Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode ee ea IED Setting the default paper IZ The setting options may differ according to your model Check your model name You can select the paper you would like to keep using for printing job From your machine s control panel Setting the paper size 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until Paper Size appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow to select the paper size you want 6 Press OK to save the selection 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Setting the paper type 1 Press Menu on the control pa
117. ber you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax the machine automatically redials the number every three minutes up to seven times according to the factory default settings When the display shows Retry Redial press OK to redial the number without waiting To cancel the automatic redialing press Stop Clear To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts See Changing the fax setup options on page 1 Redialing the last number To redial the number you called last 1 Press Redial Pause on the control panel 2 When an original is loaded in the document feeder the machine automatically begins to send If an original is placed on the scanner glass select Yes to add another page Load another original and press OK When you have finished select No at the Another Page prompt Faxing CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only 2 Sending a fax to multiple destinations You can use the Multiple Send feature which allows you to send a fax to multiple locations Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to a remote station After transmission the originals are automatically erased from memory You cannot send a color fax using this feature 1 Press Ss Fax on the control panel 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs See Adjusting the document se
118. box and the password on the Password text box c Enter the password one more time on the Confirm Password to confirm your choice Scanning to Email You can scan and send an image as an email attachment First you need to set up your email account in SyncThru Web Service See Setting up an e mail account on page 2 Before scanning you can set the scan options for your scan job See Changing the settings for each scan job on page 3 1 Make sure that your machine is connected to a network 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the ADF For details about loading an original see Loading originals on page 1 scanning_ 2 3 Press 3 Scan on the control panel 4 Press the left right arrow until Scan to Email appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK i If you registered login ID user name and password on SyncThru Web Service My Log in ID and Password appear Enter the login ID and password to your machine Go to step 6 5 When From appears on the top line of the display enter the sender s email address and press OK 6 When DestinationEmail appears on the top line of the display enter the recipient s email address and press OK If you have set up Address Book you can use a speed button or a speed email or group email number to retrieve an address from memory See Setting up Address Book on page 6 7 To enter additional addresse
119. can change the default settings for your preferences and needs To change the fax setup options 1 Press Ss Fax on the control panel 2 Press Menu on the control panel 3 Press the left right arrow until Fax Setup appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the fax setup item you want appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the option you want appears and press OK 6 Press the left right arrow until the desired status appears or enter the value for the option you have selected and press OK 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 if necessary 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Sending ECM Mode This mode helps with poor line quality and makes sure any faxes you send are sent smoothly to any other ECM equipped fax machine Sending a fax using ECM may take more time Send Report You can set your machine to print a confirmation report showing whether a transmission was successful how many pages were sent and more The available options are On Off and On Error which prints only when a transmission is not successful Image TCR This function allows users to know what fax messages have been sent by showing sent messages in the transmission report The first page of the message is turned into an image file that is printed on the transmission report so the users can see what messages have been sent However you can not use this function when sending fax without saving the dat
120. cannot guarantee a non genuine Samsung toner cartridge s quality Service or repair required as a result of using non genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty Z Check the message on the display Follow the instructions in the message or refer to troubleshooting part See Understanding display messages on page 5 If the problem persists call a service representative l4 All printing errors will be appeared in the Smart Panel program window If the problem persists call a service representative Introducing the useful buttons K eSupported optional devices and features may differ according to your model Check your model name elilustrations may differ from your machine depending on the model or its options Check your model name Menu button When you want to know the machine status and set your machine to use an advanced feature click the Menu button See Machine status and advanced feature on page 1 Power button For CLX 3185 CLX 3185N and CLX 3185WK plug the power cord into the AC power outlet and press this button the machine will be turned on When you want to turn the power off press this button until Power Down appears on the display Choose Yes to turn the power off For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW plug the power cord into the AC power outlet and then the machine will be turned on automatically When the machine goes into power save mode Power button lights on b
121. cartridge or removing jammed paper be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes gt Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested Safety information_ 4 When storing supplies such as toner cartridges keep them away from children gt Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested Using recycled supplies such as toner can cause damage to the machine gt In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies a service fee will be charged When toner gets on your clothing do not use hot water to wash it gt Hot water sets toner into fabric Use cold water regulatory information This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with several regulatory statements Laser Safety Statement The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class 1 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition e Wavelength 800 nm e Beam divergence Paraller 12 degrees Perpendicular 30 degrees e Maximum power or energy output 5 mW WARNING Never operate or service the pri
122. ccount Control windows 4 Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option 5 Read License Agreement and select accept the terms of the License Agreement Then click Next 6 The software searches the wireless network iY If the searching has failed you may check if the USB cable is connected between the computer and machine properly and follow the instruction on the window 7 After searching the window shows the wireless network devices Select the name SSID of access point you are using and click Next iY If you cannot find out the network name you want to choose or if you want to set the wireless configuration manually click Advanced Setting Enter the wireless Network Name Type the SSID of access point you want SSID is case sensitive Operation Mode Select Infrastructure eAuthentication Select an authentication type Open System Authentication is not used and encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security Shared Key Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal Select this option to authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre Shared Key This uses a shared secret key generally called Pre Shared Key passphrase which is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients eEncryption Select the encryption None WEP64 WEP128 TKIP AES TKIP AES Network Key Enter the encryption network k
123. ce anything on top of the machine water small metal or heavy objects candles lit cigarettes etc gt This could result in electric shock or fire Safety information 1 If the machine gets overheated it releases smoke makes strange noises or generates an odd odor immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the machine gt This could result in electric shock or fire AN Caution During an electrical storm or for a period of non operation remove the power plug from the electrical outlet gt This could result in electric shock or fire Be careful the paper output area is hot gt Burns could occur If the machine has been dropped or if the cabinet appears damaged unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel gt Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel gt Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire Operating method If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet do not attempt to force it in gt Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet or this could result in electric shock Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power telephone or PC interface cords gt This could result in electric shock o
124. chase Available supplies Available maintenance parts Checking replaceable s lifespan Replacing the toner cartridge Replacing the imaging unit Replacing the waste toner container SPECIFICATIONS Hardware specifications Environmental specifications Electrical specifications Print media specifications CONTACT SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE GLOSSARY copyright 2010 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved This user s guide is provided for information purposes only All information included herein is subject to change without notice Samsung Electronics 1s not responsible for any direct or indirect damages arising from or related to use of this user s guide e Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd e Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation e TrueType LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc e All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations Refer to the LICENSE txt file in the provided CD ROM for the open source license information REV 2 00 Copyright_ 1 safety information These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and others and to prevent any potential damage to your machine Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine Use common sense
125. chine and could result in electric shock or fire AN Caution Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the inside of the machine Do not clean the machine with benzene paint thinner or alcohol do not spray water directly into the machine gt This could result in electric shock or fire When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or cleaning the inside do not operate the machine gt You could get injured Safety information 3 Keep cleaning supplies away from children gt Children could get hurt Do not disassemble repair or rebuild the machine by yourself gt It can damage the machine Call a certified technician when the machine needs repair Supply usage Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean from dust or water gt Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws gt The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service technician To clean and operate the machine strictly follow the user s guide provided with the machine gt Otherwise you could damage the machine AN Caution Do not disassemble the toner cartridge gt Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser unit gt This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire When changing the toner
126. ck OK d Click Finish Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator The Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring machine devices You need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified Driver Configurator See Installing the Unified Linux Driver on page 4 After the driver is installed on your Linux system the Unified Driver Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop Opening the Unified Driver Configurator 1 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified Driver gt Unified Driver Configurator 2 Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration window Management tools_ 3 Remove Printer Removes the selected machine Set as Default Sets the current selected machine as a default machine eStop Start Stops starts the machine Test Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working properly eProperties Allows you to view and change the printer properties Classes tab The Classes tab showss a list of available machine classes 1 Printers Configuration Paraan 2 Scanners URI Configuration 3 Ports Configuration To use the on screen help click Help 3 After changing the configurations click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator Printers configuration window Printers configuration has the two
127. close redistributing the toner See Redistributing toner on page 1 Replace The estimated life of Prepare a fuser unit for Fuser soon fuser unit is close replacement See Available maintenance parts on page 1 Replace Toner v The indicated toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life The machine might stop printing iY Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life which indicates the average capacity of print outs and is designed pursuant to ISO IEC 19798 e f Stop or Continue appears in the LCD display choose one of them If you select Stop the machine stops printing and you cannot print anymore without changing the cartridge If you select Continue the machine keeps printing but the printing quality cannot be guaranteed Replace the toner cartridge for the best print quality when this message appears Using a cartridge beyond this stage can result in printing quality issues See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 A Samsung does not recommend using non genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured Samsung cannot guarantee non genuine Samsung toner cartridge s quality Service or repair required as a result of using non genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty e f the machine stops printing replace the toner cartridge See Replacing the
128. connection Scan to Email CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Setting up an e mail account Scanning to Email Changing the settings for each scan job Changing the default scan settings Setting up Address Book CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Registering speed email numbers Grouping addresses in Groups Address Book Using Address Book entries Searching Address Book for an entry Printing Address Book Using Samsung Scan and Fax Manager Set Scan Button tab Change Port tab Scanning with TWAIN enabled software Scanning using the WIA driver Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Macintosh scanning Scanning with USB Scanning with network Linux Scanning Scanning Adding Job Type Settings Using the Image Manager FAXING CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW ONLY Preparing to fax Using a fax in your computer Sending a fax Windows Checking a sent fax list Windows Sending a fax Macintosh Sending a fax in your machine Setting the fax header Sending a fax Sending a fax manually Confirming a transmission Automatic redialing Redialing the last number Sending a fax to multiple destinations Delaying a fax transmission Sending a priority fax Receiving a fax in your machine Changing the receive modes Receiving automatically in Fax mode Receiving manually in Tel mode Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone Receiving automatically in Answering Machine Fax mode Receiving faxes using DRPD mode Receiving in secure receiving mode Activating secure receiving
129. ct Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers Click right button of mouse on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes gt Start Scan New Scan application appears Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture Click Scan Macintosh scanning You can scan documents using Image Capture program Mac OS offers Image Capture program ennaa with USB 4 9 IZ Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 1 Start Applications and click Image Capture iH lf No camera or scanner connected message appears disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it If the problem persists refer to the Image Capture s help image Set the scan options on this program Scan and save your scanned image For more information about using Image Capture refer to the Image Capture s help Use TWAIN compliant software to apply more scan options eYou can also scan using TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop eScan process differ according to TWAIN compliant software Please refer to the user s guide of the software elf scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X 10 3 9 or higher and Mac OS X 10 4 7 or higher
130. d However where prior notice is impractical the company may temporarily cease service providing that they a promptly notify the customer b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68 You should also know that e Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system e If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine you may experience transmission and reception problems with all the equipment It is recommended that no other equipment except for a regular telephone share the line with your machine e If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone lines Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores e When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers use a non emergency number to advise the emergency service dispatcher of your intentions The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number e This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines e This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids You may safely connect this equipment to the
131. d and encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security Shared Key Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal Select this option to authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre Shared Key This uses a shared secret key generally called Pre Shared Key passphrase which is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients eEncryption Select the encryption None WEP64 WEP128 TKIP AES TKIP AES Network Key Enter the encryption network key value Confirm Network Key Confirm the encryption network key value eWEP Key Index If you are using the WEP Encryption select the appropriate WEP Key Index IZ The wireless network security window does appear when the access point has security setting The wireless network security window appears The window may differ according to its security mode WEP or WPA In case of WEP Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and enter WEP security key Click Next WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64 bit or 128 bit WEP encryption key eIn case of WPA Enter the WPA shared key and click Next WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key that changes automatically at regular intervals
132. d of your copies See Changing the settings for each copy on page 1 e If there are no defects on the original clean the scan unit See Cleaning the scan unit on page 3 The scanner does not work Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan Try the Prescan function to see if that works Try lowering the scan resolution rate Check that the machine cable is connected properly Make sure that the machine cable is not defective Switch the cable with a known good cable If necessary replace the cable Check that the scanner is configured correctly Check scan setting in the SmarThru or the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port for example USB001 Copy image is skewed e Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass e Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly The unit scans very slowly Check if the machine is printing received data If so scan the document after the received data has been printed Graphics are scanned more slowly than text Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting It will help to increase the speed For details about how to se
133. d then inner cover Troubleshooting_ 4 7 Carefully take the jammed paper out of the machine 8 Lower down the scan unit gently and slowly until it completely closed Make sure that it is securely latched Be careful no to pinch your fingers 9 Pull down the fuser lever 10 Close the rear door Printing automatically resumes Understanding display messages Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine s status or errors Refer to the tables below to understand the messages and their meaning and correct the problem if necessary Checking display messages IZ elf a message is not in the table reboot the power and try the printing job again If the problem persists call a service representative eWhen you call for service provide the service representative with the contents of display message Some messages may not appear on the display depending on the options or models error number indicates the error number e tray type indicates the tray number e media type indicates the media type e media size indicates the media size e color indicates the color of toner or imaging unit Message Meaning Suggested solutions COMM Error The machine has a communication problem Ask the sender to try again Incompatible The machine has received a fax from which is registered as a junk fax The received fax data will be deleted R
134. d website opens 3 From the Security tab select System Security 5 System Administrator 4 Enter the name of the administrator phone number location and E mail address 5 Click Apply Using the Smart Panel program The Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status and allows you to customize the machine s settings For Windows and Macintosh Smart Panel is installed automatically when you install the machine software For Linux you can download Smart Panel from the Samsung website and install See Installing the SmartPanel on page 5 i To use this program your computer has to meet the following system requirements Windows Check that your computer s CPU RAM and HDD meet or exceed specification See System requirements on page 2 eMac OS X 10 3 or higher Check that your computer s CPU RAM and HDD meet or exceed specification See System requirements on page 2 eLinux Check that your computer s CPU RAM and HDD meet or exceed specification See System requirements on page 2 eInternet Explorer version 5 0 or higher for flash animation in HTML Help If you need to know the exact model name of your machine you can check the supplied software CD Understanding Smart Panel If an error occurs while operating you can check the error from the Smart Panel You can also launch Smart Panel manually Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar in Windows
135. d window opens Click Next 8 Select Network printer and click Search button 9 The Printer s IP address and model name appears on list field Network setup CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only _ 5 10 Select your machine and click Next 11 1nput the printer description and Next 12 When the add printer is done click Finish 13 When the install is done click Finish Add network Printer 1 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator 2 Click Add Printer 3 The Add printer wizard window opens Click Next 4 Select Network printer and click the Search button 5 The printer s IP address and model name appears on list field 6 Select your machine and click Next 7 Input the printer description and Next 8 When the add printer is done click Finish IPv6 Configuration A TCP IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher iY If the IPv6 network seems to not be working set all the network setting to the factory defaults and try again See Restoring factory default settings on page 3 In the IPv6 network environment follow the next procedure to use the IPv6 address 1 Connect your machine to the network with a network cable 2 Turn on the machine 3 Print a Network Configuration Report from the machine s control panel that will check IPv6 addresses IZ a Press Menu on the control panel b Press the left right arrow until Network appears and press OK c Press the left right arrow until Network Inf
136. dd IZ If the printer driver does not work properly uninstall the driver and reinstall it Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh a Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on b Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive c Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop d Double click the MAC_Installer folder e Double click the Installer OS X icon f Enter the password and click OK g The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue h Select Uninstall and click Uninstall i When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears click Continue j When the uninstall is done click Quit Linux You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software http www samsung com printer To install other software See Installing the SmartPanel on page 5 See Installing the Printer Settings Utility on page 5 Install Linux Driver and add network Printer 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on Also your machine s IP address should have been set 2 Download the Unified Linux Driver package from the Samsung website 3 Extract the UnifiedLinuxDriver tar gz file and open the new directory 4 Double click the Linux folder 5 Double click the install sh icon 6 The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue 7 The Add printer wizar
137. details see Receiving faxes using DRPD mode on page 4 7 Press OK to save your selection 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode IZ eTo use the Ans Fax mode attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine elf you do not want other people to view your received documents you can use secure receiving mode In this mode all of the received faxes are stored in memory For further details see Receiving in secure receiving mode on page 5 Press the left right arrow until the fax reception mode you want appears Receiving automatically in Fax mode Your machine is preset Fax mode at the factory When you receive a fax the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax To change the number of rings see Fax setup CLX 3185FN CLX 31 85FW only on page 1 Receiving manually in Tel mode You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing Black Start or Color Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine The machine begins receiving a fax and returns to ready mode when the reception is completed Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without going to the fax machine When you receive a call on the ex
138. ding a priority fax This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of reserved operations The original is scanned into memory and immediately transmitted when the current operation is finished In addition priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between stations example when the transmission to station A ends before transmission to station B begins or between redial attempts 1 Press Ss Fax on the control panel 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs See Adjusting the document settings on page 5 4 Press Menu on the control panel 5 Press the left right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK Faxing CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only _ 3 6 Press the left right arrow until Priority Send appears and press OK 7 Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK You can press speed dial numbers or select group dial number using Address book button For details see Setting up Address Book on page 6 8 Enter the job name you want and press OK The original is scanned into memory before transmission 9 If an original is placed on the scanner glass select Yes to add another pages Load another original and press OK When you have finished select No at the Another Page prompt The machine starts to scan and send a fax to des
139. driver name gt Maintenance c Select the option as you wish follow the instruction on the window Macintosh 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on Also your machine s IP address should have been set 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive 3 Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop 4 Double click the MAC_Installer folder 5 Double click the Installer OS X icon 6 Enter the password and click OK 7 The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue 8 Read the license agreement and click Continue 9 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement 10 Select Easy Install and click Install Easy Install is recommended for most users All components necessary for machine operations will be installed If you select Custom Install you can choose individual components to install 11 The message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears Click Continue 12 Select Typical installation for a network printer for a network printer and then click OK 13 The SetIP program automatically runs If the machine has already configured network information close the SetIP program 14 Click OK to continue the installation 15 The Fax Queue Creator window appears during the installation process For CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK click Cancel to go to the next step For CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW select your machine name from t
140. e WH Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the printout Always keep the glass clean See Cleaning the scan unit on page 3 Selecting print media You can print on a variety of print media such as plain paper envelopes labels and transparencies Always use print media that meets the guidelines for use with your machine and from the appropriate tray Guidelines for selecting the print media Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this User s Guide may cause the following problems e Poor print quality e Increased paper jams e Premature wear on the machine e Permanent fuser damage not covered under warranty Properties such as weight composition grain and moisture content are important factors that affect the machine s performance and the output quality When you choose print materials consider the following factors e The type size and weight of the print media for your machine are described in print media specifications See Print media specifications on page 3 e Desired outcome The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project e Brightness Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper and more vibrant images e Surface smoothness The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper i Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory
141. e Paper has not been loaded correctly Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly e There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray e The paper is too thick Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine See Selecting print media on page 2 The paper keeps jamming e There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray e An incorrect type of paper is being used Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine See Selecting print media on page 2 e There may be debris inside the machine Open the front door and remove any debris Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes Paper feeding problems Condition Suggested solutions Paper jams during printing Clear the paper jam See Clearing paper jams on page 2 Troubleshooting_ 9 Printing problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The machine does not print The machine is not receiving power Check the power cord connections Check the power switch and the power source The machine is not selected as the default machine Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows Check the machine for the following e The front door or rear door i
142. e and pull to remove the cartridge from the machine e Clearing paper jams e Understanding display messages e Solving other problems 3 Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge Y If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric AN Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area 4 Make sure that the color of the toner cartridge matches the color slot and then grasp the handles on the toner cartridge Insert the cartridge until it clicks into place 5 Close the front door Make sure the door is securely latched A If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate Tips for avoiding paper jams By selecting the correct media types most paper jams can be avoided When a paper jam occurs refer to the guidelines below See Clearing paper jams on page 2 e Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly See Loading Troubleshooting_ 1 paper in the tray on page 4 e Do not overload the tray Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray e Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing e Flex fan and straighten paper before loading e Do not use creased damp or highly curled paper e Do not mix pape
143. e and the number of copies Wireless LED CLX 3185FW Shows the current status of the wireless network connection See Understanding the Status LED on page 8 FAFA O Status LED Shows the status of your machine See Understanding the Status LED on page 8 Color Start Begins a printing job in color mode On Hook Dial Engages the telephone line Back Sends you back to the upper menu level Introduction 6 Scan Email Activates Scan mode 3 B Toner Color The toner colors shown below LCD display co works with the display messages See Acknowledging the status of the toner cartridge on page 9 Direct USB CLX 3185FN Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB port on the front of your machine See Using USB memory device CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FW only on page 1 WPS CLX 3185FW If your wireless access point supports Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS you can configure the machine easily without a computer See WPS button CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FW only on page 9 Introduction 7 Understanding the Status LED The color of the Status LED indicates the machine s current status Status Description Off e The machine is off line e The machine is in power saver mode When data is received or any button is pressed it switches to on line automatically e Wireless function can
144. e appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Secure Receive appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until On appears and press OK Enter a four digit password you want to use and press OK oa eS 2 fH You can activate secure receiving mode without setting a password but cannot protect your faxes 7 Re enter the password to confirm it and press OK 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode When a fax is received in secure receiving mode your machine stores it in memory and shows Secure Receive to let you know that there is a fax received Printing received faxes 1 Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 4 in Activating secure receiving mode 2 Press the left right arrow until Print appears and press OK 3 Enter the four digit password and press OK The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory Deactivating secure receiving mode 1 Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 4 in Activating secure receiving mode 2 Press the left right arrow until Off appears and press OK 3 Enter the four digit password and press OK The mode is deactivated and the machine prints all faxes stored in memory 4 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Receiving faxes in memory Since your machine is a multi tasking device it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing your machine sto
145. e bottom or rear of the machine In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line and is useful for determining whether you have overloaded the line Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls especially ringing when your line is called The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company In some cases a sum of five may not be usable on your line If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly you should immediately remove it from your telephone line as it may cause harm to the telephone network The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXXX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company A FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be stoppe
146. e file format as it is used in Microsoft Excel has become a de facto standard throughout the industry even among non Microsoft platforms DADF A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder DADF is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state reset or initialized DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a client server networking protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting generally information required by the client host to participate on an IP network DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module DIMM a small circuit board that holds memory DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data received fax data DLNA The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a standard that allows devices on a home network to share information with each other across the network DNS The Domain Name Server DNS is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks such as the Internet Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact striking an in
147. e option you want appears and press OK 4 Press OK when Yes appears to confirm printing The selected information prints out Using Samsung Scan and Fax Manager If you have installed the printer driver the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program is installed too For program information and the scanner s status start Samsung Scan and Fax Manager With this program you can change scan settings and add or delete the folders where scanned documents are saved in your computer K The Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program can only be used in the Windows and Mac OS system If you use the Macintosh See Setting scan information in Scan and Fax Manager on page 7 1 From the Start menu click Control Panel gt Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 4 You can open Samsung Scan and Fax Manager by right clicking the Smart Panel icon in the Windows task bar and selecting Scan Manager 2 Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager window 3 Press Properties 4 The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the file saving destination and scan settings to add or delete application program and to change the file format to be saved You can change the scanning machine by using the Change Port tab Local or Network 5 When setting is done press OK Scanning_ 4 Set Scan Button tab Samsung CLX 3180 Series Property Local Scanner Scan Destination Awailable Destination List Front Panel Destination List Destin
148. e pages on one sheet of paper on page 7 eLayout Direction This option allows you to select the printing direction on a page similar to the examples on the screen Border This option allows you to print a border around each page on the sheet Reverse Page Orientation This option allows you to rotate paper 180 degrees Graphics The Graphics dialog provides options for selecting Quality and Color mode Select Graphics from the drop down list to access the graphic features eQuality This option allows you to select the printing resolution The higher setting option you choose the better sharpness and clarity of printed characters or images are A higher setting will also increase the time it takes to print a document Color mode You can set the color options Setting to Color typically produces the best possible print quality for color documents If you want to print a color document in grayscale select Grayscale Paper Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print This will let you get the best quality printout If you load a different type of print material select the corresponding paper type Printer Features The Printer Features dialog provides Advanced Options and Color Adjust options Select Printer Features from the drop down list to access the following features Fine Edge It allows users to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability and align c
149. e sustainable reuse of material resources Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal This marking on the product accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories e g charger headset USB Regulatory information 2 Correct disposal of batteries in this product Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems This marking on the battery manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed with other household waste at the end of their working life Where marked the chemical symbols Hg Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006 66 If batteries are not properly disposed of these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local free battery return system Taiwan only KH Il I AE HO SR E RA EE
150. e the manufacturer System Restoration Kit or contact manufacturer Technical Support for additional information OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2001 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the Regulatory information_ 8 documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission 5 For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 6 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 7 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by
151. eady mode Setting a wireless network with USB cable IZ Refer to your network administrator or the person that set up your wireless network for information about your network configuration Installing the machine on a wireless network with an Access Point Windows Items to prepare Ensure you have next items ready e Access point e Network connected computer e Software CD that provided with your machine e The machine installed with a wireless network interface e USB cable Creating the infrastructure network in Windows When the items are ready follow below steps Wireless network setup CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only 3 1 Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine 2 Turn on your computer access point and machine 3 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appears elf the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive Click OK elf you use Windows Vista Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start gt All programs gt Accessories gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive and click OK elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue or Yes in the User A
152. econfirm junk fax setup See Changing the fax setup options on page 1 Line Busy The receiving fax machine did not answer or the line is already engaged Try again after a few minutes Line Error Your machine cannot connect with the receiving fax machine or has lost contact because of a problem with the phone line Try again If the problem persists wait an hour or so for the line to clear and try again Or Turn the ECM mode on See Fax setup CLX 3185FN CLX 3185 FW only on page 1 BOOTP problem Auto IP Run The IP address assignment is failed This happens when Auto IP for BOOTP is set in SyncThru Web Service Change the IP address assignment method to DHCP or Static If you do not change this option the BOOTP server continually asks to assign the IP address BOOTP problem Reconfigure DHCP The IP address assignment is failed This happens when Auto IP for BOOTP is not set in SyncThru Web Service Change the IP address assignment method to DHCP or Static If you do not change this option the BOOTP server continually asks to assign the IP address Troubleshooting 5 Message Meaning Suggested solutions DHCP problem Auto IP Run The IP address assignment is failed This happens when Auto IP for DHCP is set in SyncThru Web Service Change the IP address assignment method to BOOTP or Static If you do not change this option the
153. ect it from the Favorites drop down list The machine is now set to scan according to the setting you selected To delete saved setting select it from the Favorites drop down list and click Delete To set a favorite as startup select the favorite you want to set as startup then click the Set as default button Scan settings The following scan options are available Image Type Allows you to chose the proper color settings for image scanning Resolution Allows you to choose the image resolution Document Size Allows you to choose the proper size of the scanned image Document Source Allows you to choose the device document feeder or scan glass you want to scan with Prompt for additional pages If this check box is checked you can scan pages continuously This option is useful when you scan multi page documents and or when Document Source is set to Flatbed platen glass In this case a sequence of scanned images is processed as a single document Pages to Scan Allows you to specify how many pages are to be scanned This option is available when Document Source is set to ADF Document feeder ePreference The following scan options are available Auto crop image after preview If this option is checked the scanning area will be automatically adjusted to the image size Preview on program start If this option is checked the scanning area will be selected automatically as shown in the preview Blank page detecti
154. ed elf the original is larger than the printable area some portions may not be printed elf you press Stop Clear or if no buttons are pressed for approximately 30 seconds the machine cancels the copy job and returns to ready mode Using special copy features You can use the following copy features 2 up or 4 up copying N up Your machine can print 2 or 4 original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of paper Ni IN N hil i Hl 1 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ For CLX 3185 and CLX 3185N press Menu on the control panel For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW press 9 Copy and Menu in order on the control panel Po Ka GA IE Meh Copying 2 2 Press the left right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Layout appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until 2 Up or 4 Up appears and press OK to save the selection 5 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode You cannot adjust the copy size using Reduce Enlarge menu for making a 2 or 4 up copy Poster copying Your machine can print an image onto 9 sheets of paper 3x3 You can paste the printed pages together to make one poster sized document This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass A 3x3 1 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ Fo
155. egory you want appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until All appears and press OK 6 Press the left right arrow until the name and number you want appears Searching with a particular first letter through the memory 1 Press lt amp Fax on the control panel 2 Press Address Book on the control panel 3 Press the left right arrow until Search amp Dial appears and press OK Faxing CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only _ 7 4 Press the left right arrow until the number category you want appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until ID appears and press OK 6 Enter the first few letters of the name you want 7 Press the left right arrow until the name and number you want appears Deleting a Address Book for entry 1 Press Ss Fax on the control panel 2 Press Address Book on the control panel 3 Press the left right arrow until Delete appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the number category you want appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the searching method you want appears and press OK Select Search All to search for an entry by scanning through all entries in Address Book Select Search ID to search for an entry by the first few letters of the name 6 Press the left right arrow until the name you want appears and press OK Or enter the first letters Press the left right arrow until the name you want appears and press OK 7 Press OK when Yes appear
156. ends scanned documents of the fax job Prepare new Transfer belt The estimated life of transfer unit ITB is close The estimated life of a transfer unit ITB is close See Available maintenance parts on page 1 Remove seal tape amp Install Toner The machine cannot detect a toner Remove the sealing tape from the toner cartridge Network Problem IP Conflict The IP address is used elsewhere Check the IP address or obtain a new IP address cartridge Refer to the Quick Installation Guide Replace new The transfer unit ITB Prepare the transfer unit Transfer belt has almost reached its estimated life ITB with a new one See Available maintenance parts on page 1 No Answer The receiving fax machine has not answered after several redial attempts Try again Make sure that the receiving machine is operational Replace new Transfer roller The transfer roller has almost reached its estimated life Replace the transfer roller with a new one See Available maintenance parts on page 1 Troubleshooting_ 6 Message Meaning Suggested solutions Prepare toner Small amount of toner Prepare a new cartridge Message Meaning Suggested solutions h is left in the indicated for a replacement You cartridge The may temporarily increase estimated cartridge the printing quality by life of toner is
157. ening printing preferences on page 2 Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly you may notice a reduction in print quality See the table below to clear the problem Condition Suggested Solutions Light or faded print the page printer driver cleaning If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on e The toner supply is low You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life See Redistributing toner on page 1 If this does not improve the print quality install a new toner cartridge e The paper may not meet paper specification for example the paper may be too moist or rough See Selecting print media on page 2 e Ifthe entire page is light the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off See the help screen of the e A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs e The surface of the Laser Scanning Unit LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU contact a service representative The top half of the paper is printed lighter than the rest of the paper AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc paper Recycled The toner might not adhere properly to this type of e Change the printer option and try again Go to the Printing Preferences click the Paper tab and s
158. ephone 4 redialing the last number 2 sending 2 sending a priority fax 3 setting the fax header 2 speed dial 6 features 1 machine features 1 power saving feature 3 print media feature 3 printer driver 1 supplied software 1 front view CLX 3185 CLX 3185N 1 front view CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW 4 G glossary 1 l id copy 3 6 2 introducing buttons 8 J jam clearing paper 2 tips for avoiding paper jams 1 job timeout setting 4 L language 1 LCD display changing the display language 1 LED machine status 8 understanding the status LED 8 left right arrow 3 6 Linux common Linux problems 16 driver installation for network connected 5 driver installation for USB cable connected 4 printer properties 8 printing 7 scanning 7 supplied software 2 system requirements 3 unified driver configurator 3 using SetlP 3 loading in the document feeder 1 originals on the scanner glass 1 special media 4 Macintosh common Macintosh problems 17 driver installation for network connected 5 driver installation for USB cable connected 4 printing 6 scanning 7 sharing a machine locally 6 supplied software 2 system requirements 2 using SetIP 3 9 maintenance parts 1 manual tray using special media 4 memory clearing memory 3 menu overview 4 N network driver installation Linux 5 Macintosh 5 Windows 3 installing environment 1 introducing network programs 1 IPv6 configuration 6 SetIP program 2 3 8
159. eps 1 Open Control Panel 2 Double click Security Center 3 Click Windows Firewall 4 Disable the firewall Installing the program 1 Insert the Printer Software CD ROM provided with your machine When the driver CD runs automatically close that window 2 Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive X represents your CD ROM drive 3 Double click Application gt SetIP 4 Double click Setup exe to install this program 5 Select a language then click Next 6 Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation Starting the program 1 Connect your machine to the network with a network cable 2 Turn on the machine 3 From the Windows Start menu select All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt SetIP gt SetIP 4 Click on the TI icon third from left in the SetlP window to open the TCP IP configuration window 5 Enter the machine s new information into the configuration window as follows In a corporate intranet you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding TCP IP Configuration TCP IP Mac Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Cancel eMAC Address Find the machine s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons For example 00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes 0015992951A8 eIP Address Enter a new IP address for your printer For example if your computer s IP address is 192
160. er problems BASIC SETUP Altitude adjustment Changing the display language Setting the date and time CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Changing the clock mode CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Changing the default mode CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Setting sounds Key sound and alarm sound CLX 3185 CLX 3185N only Speaker ringer key sound and alarm sound CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Speaker volume CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Entering characters using the number keypad CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Entering alphanumeric characters Keypad letters and numbers Correcting numbers or names Inserting a pause Using the save modes Using the power saving feature Setting the default paper From your machine s control panel From your computer Setting job timeout Setting the humidity mode MEDIA AND TRAY Loading originals On the scanner glass In the document feeder CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Selecting print media Guidelines for selecting the print media Media sizes supported in each mode Changing the tray size for print media Loading paper in the tray In the tray Manual feeding in the tray Printing on special media Envelopes Transparencies Labels CardStock Custom sized paper Letterhead Preprinted paper Glossy photo Matte photo Setting the paper size and type Setting the paper size Setting the paper type Using the output support COTONNNDDOADAIAIAIAITHPHPHPWWWWWAWNMNDND Ba WDWWWWNNNDND 3 2 2 PRINTING Introducing use
161. er to the user s guide of the software elf scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X 10 4 7 or higher Setting scan information in Scan and Fax Manager When you want to find out about Scan and Fax Manager program information to check the installed scan driver s condition to change scan settings and to add or delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are saved in Scan and Fax Manager program follow the below steps 1 From the Smart Panel menu on Status bar click Scan and Fax Manager 2 Select the appropriate machine from the Scan and Fax Manager 3 Press Properties 4 Use Set Scan Button to change the file destination or scan settings to add or delete application programs and to format files You can change the scanning machine by using Change Port Local or Network 5 When done press OK Linux Scanning You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window Scanning 1 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop 2 Click the 3 button to switch to Scanners configuration Scanning 7 3 Select the scanner on the list cao If you use only one machine device and it is connected to the computer and turned on your scanner appears on the list and is automatically selected If you have two or more scanners connected to your computer you can select any scan
162. er where you purchased your machine You can also visit www samsung com supplies and then select your country region to obtain the information on calling for service Available supplies When supplies reach their lifespan you can order the following types of supplies for your machine Type Average yield Part name Standard yield toner cartridge Average K407 CLT K407S Black continuous black C407 CLT C407S Cyan cartridge yield M407 CLT M407S Magenta 1 500 standard Y407 CLT Y407S Yellow pages Black Region A nigga color K4072 CLT K40728 Black Ca C4072 CLT C4072S Cyan 1 000 standard M4072 CLT M4072S Magenta pages Y4072 CLT Y4072S Yellow Yellow Magenta C Region B yan K4073 CLT K4073S Black C4073 CLT C4073S Cyan M4073 CLT M4073S Magenta Y4073 CLT Y4073S Yellow Imaging unit Approx 24 000 CLT R407 images Waste toner Approx 10 000 CLT W409 container images Full color 5 image a Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19798 e Replacing the toner cartridge e Replacing the imaging unit e Replacing the waste toner container b Region A Albania Austria Belgium Bosnia Bulgaria Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Italy Latvia Lithuania Macedonia Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal romania Serbia Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland UK c Region B Banglad
163. erating system developed by Novell Inc It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack Today NetWare supports TCP IP as well as IPX SPX OPC Organic Photo Conductor OPC is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer and it is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage in the printer and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from contact with the cartridge development brush cleaning mechanism and paper Originals The first example of something such as a document photograph or text etc which is copied reproduced or translated to produce others but which is not itself copied or derived from something else OSI Open Systems Interconnection OSI is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization ISO for communications OSI offers a standard modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable self contained functional layers The layers are from top to bottom Application Presentation Session Transport Network Data Link and Physical PABX A private automatic branch exchange PABX is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise PCL Printer Command Language
164. es under 1 000 m 3 281 ft Refer to the altitude setting to optimize your printing See Altitude adjustment on page 1 Place the machine on a flat stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 2 mm 0 08 inch Otherwise printing quality may be e Installing USB connected machine s driver e Sharing your machine locally affected Remove all tape Install the toner cartridge Load paper See Loading paper in the tray on page 4 Make sure that all cables are connected to the machine Turn the machine on DD Mao N When you move the machine do not tilt or turn it upside down Otherwise the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner which can cause damage to the machine or bad print quality This machine will not operate when the power main fails Supplied software After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer You must install the machine software If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS user install the software from the supplied CD or if you are a Linux OS user download the software from the Samsung website www samsung com printer and install on your computer IZ Machine software is occasionally updated for reasons like the release of new operating system and etc If needed download the latest version from the Samsung website www samsung com printer Installed software may be different depending on each model Getting started_ 1
165. es you no longer need from the memory and then try to store the fax again Call a service representative No dial tone e Check that the phone line is properly connected e Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone Blank areas appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages with a small strip of text at the top You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting For details about paper settings see Setting the paper size and type on page 6 The numbers stored in memory do not dial correctly Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly Print an Address Book list See Setting up Address Book on page 6 Samsung Scan and Fax Manager Problem The original does not feed into the machine Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly Check that the original is the right size not too thick or thin e Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed e The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative Condition suggested solution Samsung Scan and Fax Manager does not work Check your system requirements Samsung Scan and Fax Manager works in Windows and Mac OS See System requirements on page 2 Common Windows problems Condition Suggested solutions Faxes are not received automatically e The rece
166. esent An environment with salty air Handling instructions e Do not touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the cartridge e Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock e Never manually rotate the drum especially in the reverse direction this can cause internal damage and toner spillage Use of non Samsung and refilled toner cartridge Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic store brand refilled or remanufactured toner cartridges A Samsung s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled remanufactured or non Samsung brand toner cartridge Estimated cartridge life Estimated cartridge life the life of the toner cartridge yield depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require The actual print yield may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on operating environment printing interval media type and or media size For example if you print a lot of graphics the consumption of the toner is high and you may need to change the cartridge more often Maintenance parts To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following items will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the life span of each item has expired Items Yield A
167. esh China India Nepal Vietnam d Image counts based on one color on each page If you print documents in full color Cyan Magenta Yellow Black the life of this item will be reduced by 25 When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies these must be purchased in the same country as the machine you are using Otherwise new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the specific country conditions Available maintenance parts To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following parts will need to be replaced after printing the specified number of pages or when the life span of each item has expired Items Average yield Fuser unit Approx 50 000 black pages or 12 500 color pages Transfer roller Approx 50 000 black pages or 12 500 color pages Transfer unit ITB Approx 50 000 black pages or 12 500 color pages Pick up roller Approx 50 000 pages a Yield is affected by operating system used computing performance application software connecting method media type media size and job complexity To purchase maintenance parts contact the source where you purchased the machine Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service provider dealer or the retaile
168. ess network ePIN mode Entering the supplied PIN number on a Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS enabled access point or wireless router you can manually connect your machine to a wireless network 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Setting a wireless network in PBC mode Factory default in your machine is PBC mode Connecting to a wireless network in PBC mode To connect your machine to the wireless network in PBC mode follow the steps below You also need to check the WPS O button on the control panel and the messages on the display l4 You can check the status of the wireless network connection See Understanding the Status LED on page 8 1 Press the WPS O button for more than two seconds on the control panel 2 Push WPS on AP within 02 00 The machine starts waiting for up to two minutes until you press the WPS PBC button on the access point or wireless router 3 Press the WPS PBC button on the access point or wireless router within two minutes 4 Connecting The machine is connecting to the access point or wireless router 5 Connected When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network the blue wireless LED light stays on AP SSID After completing the wireless network connection process AP s SSID information appears on the display Y If the machine fails to connect to the wireless network the Connecting Failed and the Wait 2 minutes for Reconnecting messages appear i
169. et the paper type to Troubleshooting_ 11 Condition Suggested Solutions Condition Suggested Solutions Toner specks The paper may not meet specification for example the paper may be too moist or rough See Selecting print media on page 2 The paper path may need cleaning See Cleaning the inside on page 1 If faded areas generally rounded occur randomly on the page A single sheet of paper may be defective Try reprinting the job The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface Try a different brand of paper See Selecting print media on page 2 The paper lot is bad The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner Try a different kind or brand of paper Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click Paper tab and set type to Thick See Opening printing preferences on page 2 If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative Black background AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable Change to a lighter weight paper See Selecting print media on page 2 Check the environmental conditions very dry low humidity or high humidity higher than 80 RH conditions can increase the amount of background shading Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartrid
170. ettings you want from the Options window SmarThru The supplied software CD provides you with SmarThru SmarThru offers you convenient features to use with your machine Starting SmarThru Follow the steps below to start SmarThru 1 Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other 2 Once you have installed SmarThru you will see the SmarThru icon on your desktop 3 Double click the SmarThru icon Li a SmarThru 4 The SmarThru appears Scan To Image Scan to Allows you to scan an image and save it to an application or folder email it or publish it on a website eImage Allows you to edit an image you have saved as a graphic file and send it to a selected application or folder email it or publish it on a website ePrint Allows you to print images you have saved You can print images in black and white or color mode if your machine supports it For more information about SmarThru click J at the top right corner of the window The SmarThru help window appears you can see it supplied on the SmarThru program i Follow the steps below to uninstall SmarThru Before you begin the uninstall ensure that all applications are closed on your computer a From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs b Select Samsung Printers gt SmarThru 4 gt Uninstall SmarThru 4 c When your computer asks you to confirm your selection read the statement and cli
171. ever it is advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area If you need additional information about ozone contact your local Samsung dealer Regulatory information_ 1 Mercury Safety Hg Contains Mercury Dispose According to Local State or Federal Laws U S A only Power Saver Paa This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time power consumption is automatically lowered TIKA ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U S marks For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http www energystar gov ENERGY STAR Recycling Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner Be China only a AC RH 15 45 EP NS tPA GE FRA AEA RSE mE SBCA FBSA BZ BAIS ALE TCE SEE ISI ERR IH HIRE LEERAREA m WERNI MAGKA RISKIN HEELS Correct Disposal of This Product Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems cable should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote th
172. ey value Confirm Network Key Confirm the encryption network key value WEP Key Index If you are using the WEP Encryption select the appropriate WEP Key Index iY The wireless network security window appears when the access point has security setting The wireless network security window appears The window may differ according to its security mode WEP or WPA eIn case of WEP Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and enter WEP security key Click Next WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64 bit or 128 bit WEP encryption key eIn case of WPA Enter the WPA shared key and click Next WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key that changes automatically at regular intervals WPA also uses TKIP Temporal Key Integrity Protocol and AES Advanced Encryption Standard for data encryption 8 The window shows the wireless network setting and check if settings are right Click Next For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP check if DHCP is shown in the window However if it shows Static click Change TCP IP to change the assignment method to DHCP For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static check if Static is shown in the window However if it shows DHCP click Change TCP IP to enter the
173. fer from your machine depending on its options or models Check your model name You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory device There are two ways of doing this you can scan to the device using the default settings or you can customize your own scan settings Scanning 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass For details about loading an original see Loading originals on page 1 3 Press 3 Scan on the control panel 4 Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display Press Color Start or Black Start when Ready to Scan appears Regardless of the button you press the color mode is decided as customized See Customizing Scan to USB on page 2 Using USB memory device CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FW only 1 Your machine begins scanning the original and then asks if you want to scan another page 5 Press OK when Yes appears to scan more pages Load another original to be scanned and press Color Start or Black Start Regardless of the button you press the color mode is decided as customized See Customizing Scan to USB on page 2 Otherwise press the left right arrow to select No and press OK After scanning is complete you can remove the USB memory device from the machine Customizing Scan to USB You can specify image size file format or color
174. figuration Supplies Info Address Book Send Report Sent Report Fax RCV Report Schedule Jobs JunkFax Report Network Info User Auth List PCL Font List Fax Option Maintenance Supplies Life Color Serial Number Clear Setting All Settings Fax Setup Copy Setup Scan Setup System Setup Network Setup Address Book Sent Report Fax RCV Report Machine status and advanced feature 5 Items Option Network TCP IP DHCP BOOTP Static TCP IP IPv6 IPv6 Activate DHCPv6 Config Ethernet Speed Auto 10M Half 10M Full 100M Half 100M Full Wireless WPS Setting WLAN Setting WLAN Default WLAN Signal Clear Setting Network Info a CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN only b CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only c CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only d CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FW only Machine status and advanced feature_ 6 management tools This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine This chapter includes e Introducing useful management tools e Using SyncThru Web Service CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model Check your model name See Features by Models on page 2 Introducing useful management tools The programs below help you to use your machine conveniently e Using SyncThru Web Service CLX 3185N CLX
175. for operating any electrical appliance and whenever using your machine Also follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the accompanying literature After reading this section keep it in a safe place for future reference Important safety symbols This section explains the meanings of all icons and signs in the user s guide These safety symbols are in order according to the degree of danger Explanation of all icons and signs used in the user s guide Warning Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage Do not attempt Do not disassemble Do not touch Unplug the power cord from the wall socket Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock Call the service center for help Follow directions explicitly eC0GCQ 000 h6 Operating environment A Warning Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is not grounded gt This could result in electric shock or fire Do not bend or place heavy objects on the power cord gt Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy object could result in electric shock or fire Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord do not handle the plug with wet hands gt This could result in electric shock or fire Do not pla
176. ful software program Samsung AnyWeb Print Samsung Easy Color Manager Printer driver features Printer driver Basic printing Canceling a print job Opening printing preferences Using a favorite setting Using help Using special print features Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper Printing posters Printing booklets Manual Printing on both sides of the paper Manual Change percentage of your document Fitting your document to a selected paper size Using watermarks Using overlay Advanced Options Changing the default print settings Setting your machine as a default machine Printing to a file PRN Macintosh printing Printing a document Changing printer settings Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper Linux printing Printing from applications Printing files Configuring Printer Properties COPYING Basic copying Changing the settings for each copy Darkness Original Type Reduced or enlarged copy Changing the default copy settings ID card copying Using special copy features 2 up or 4 up copying N up Poster copying Clone copying Erasing background images Gray enhance copying Deciding the form of copy output SCANNING Nann N OON NY NN N NAO O Oa NO BBBROD WW W N N NOAUBBBBBRRWOWWNNNNNNN 232 Basic scanning method Scanning originals and sending to your computer Scan to PC For USB connected machine For network connected machine CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WkK only Scanning by a network
177. g a USB memory device e Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device e Print data stored on a USB memory device e Restore backup files to the machine s memory e Format the USB memory device e Check the available memory space Plugging in a USB memory device The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USB V1 1 and USB V2 0 memory devices Your machine supports USB memory devices with FAT16 FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes Check your USB memory device s file system from your dealer You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type connector nG Q of O X Use only a metal shielded USB memory device Only use a USB memory device that has obtained compatibility certification otherwise the machine might not recognize it Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on the front of your machine A eDo not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation or writing to or reading from USB memory The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by user s misuse e Printing from a USB memory device e Backing up data e Managing USB memory elf your USB memory device has certain features such as security settings and password settings your machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see the user s guide of the USB memory device Scanning to a USB memory device IZ Illustrations on this user s guide may dif
178. g for up to two minutes until you enter the supplied PIN number on the access point or wireless router 3 Enter the supplied PIN number on the access point or wireless router within two minutes 4 Connecting The machine is connecting to the wireless network 5 Connected When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network the blue wireless LED light stays on AP SSID After completing the wireless network connection process AP s SSID information appears on the display iY If the machine fails to connect to the wireless network the Connecting Failed and the Wait 2 minutes for Reconnecting messages appear in turn on the display Then the machine tries to re connect to the wireless network Re connecting to a wireless network in PIN mode If you press the WPS O button on the control panel when the wireless function is off the machine automatically tries to re connect to the access point or wireless router with the previously used wireless connection settings and address button on the control panel again When the access point Wi Fi Network is in idle mode The Disconnected message appears on the display The machine is returned to ready mode When the access point Wi Fi Network is being used The Wait Job to Finish message appears on the display The machine waits until the current job is finished Then the wireless network connection is automatically disconnected The machine is returned to r
179. g in an airplane IEEE 802 11 also known as wireless Ethernet and Bluetooth communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication AN In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful the option to use a wireless device may be restricted or eliminated Airports Hospitals and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device A Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices Since your system is equipped with a wireless device when traveling between countries with your system check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country A If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are in place and the system is fully assembled A Wireless devices are not user serviceable Do not modify them in any way Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it Contact manufacturer for service A Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used Se
180. g on special media e Setting the paper size and type e Using the output support 2 Place the original face down on the scanner glass Align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass 3 Close the scanner lid Z eLeaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption eDust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout Always keep it clean See Cleaning the scan unit on page 3 elf you are copying a page from a book or magazine lift the scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm start copying with the scanner lid open A eBe careful not to break the scanner glass You may get hurt eDo not put hands while closing the scanner lid The scanner lid may fall on your hands and get hurt eDo not look the light from inside of the scanner while copying or scanning It is harmful to eyes In the document feeder CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Using the document feeder you can load up to 15 sheets of paper 75 g m 20 Ib bond for one job 1 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading originals Media and tray_ 1 2 Load the original face up into the document feeder Make sure that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input tray 3 Adjust the document feeder width guides to the paper siz
181. g paper from the machine 1 Holding the inner cover open carefully take the jammed paper out of the machine The inner cover will then close automatically Lower down the scan unit gently until it is completely closed Make sure that it is securely latched Printing automatically resumes A Be careful not to pinch your fingers If you do not see the paper lower down the scan unit gently until it is completely closed Go to the next step 2 To remove the jammed paper open the rear door M s Troubleshooting_ 3 3 Carefully remove the paper by pulling in the direction as shown below Most of the jammed paper can be removed in this step M R 4 Close the rear door Printing automatically resumes In the paper exit area l4 Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open and close the front door The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine 2 Gently pull the paper out the output tray If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when you pull stop and go to the next step 3 Open the rear door 4 f you see the jammed paper pull it straight up Skip to step 10 If you do not see the paper or if there is any resistance when you pull stop and go to the next step 5 Pull up the fuser lever l4 The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 6 Open the scan unit first an
182. g problems on page 14 e See Fax problems on page 15 e See Samsung Scan and Fax Manager Problem on page 15 e See Common Windows problems on page 15 e See Common Linux problems on page 16 e See Common Macintosh problems on page 17 Power problems i Click this link to open an animation about solving power problems Troubleshooting_ 8 Condition Suggested solutions Condition Suggested solutions The machine is not receiving power or the connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly e Plug in the power cord and press Xpower on the control panel Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it For Local Printing For Network Printing CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Paper sticks together e Ensure there is not too much paper in the tray The tray can hold up to 130 sheets of paper depending on the thickness of your paper e Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper See Setting the paper size and type on page 6 e Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper e Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together replace with a new stack Multiple sheets of paper do not feed Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray Load paper of only one type size and weight Paper does not feed into the machine e Remove any obstructions from inside the machine
183. ge on page 2 Toner smear AaBbCc AaBhCc AaBhCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Clean the inside of the machine See Cleaning the inside on page 1 Check the paper type and quality See Selecting print media on page 2 Remove the toner cartridge and then install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 White Spots If white spots appear on the page The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner devices within the machine which means the transfer belt may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine Contact a service representative The paper path may need cleaning Contact a service representative Vertical repetitive defects AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc _ AaBbCc If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals The toner cartridge may be damaged If a repetitive mark occurs on the page print a cleaning sheet several times to clean the cartridge After the printout if you still have the same problems remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 Parts of the machine may have toner on them If the defects occur on the back of the page the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages The fusing assembly may be damaged Contact a service representative Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page The drum inside the toner c
184. graphics file format on that platform BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each Glossary_ 1 client BOOTP enables diskless workstation computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system CCD Charge Coupled Device CCD is a hardware which enables the scan job CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple copy job in sets When collation is selected the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies Control Panel A control panel is a flat typically vertical area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed They are typically found in front of the machine Coverage It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing For example 5 coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5 image or text on it So if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it the coverage will be higher and at the same time a toner usage will be as much as the coverage CSV Comma Separated Values CSV A type of file format CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications Th
185. he Printer Name list and click Create When the confirmation window appears click OK 16 Click Continue on the Read me window 17 After the installation is finished click Restart 18 Open the Applications folder 5 Utilities 5 Print Setup Utility For Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 open the Applications folder gt System Preferences and click Print amp Fax 19 Click Add on the Printer List For Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 click the icon A display window will pop up 20 For Mac OS X 10 3 select the IP Printing tab For Mac OS X 10 4 click IP Printer For Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 click IP 21 Select HP Jetdirect Socket in Protocol When printing a document containing many pages printing performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option 22 Enter the machine s IP address in the Address input field 23 Enter the queue name in the Queue input field If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server try using the default queue first 24 For Mac OS X 10 3 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name For Mac OS X 10 4 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model For Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 if Auto Select does not work properly choose Select Printer Software and your machine name in Print Using Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default machine 25 Click A
186. he printer location and name The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration eConnection This option allows you to view or select another port If you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use you must re configure the machine port in this tab eDriver This option allows you to view or select another machine driver By clicking Options you can set the default device options eJobs This option shows the list of print jobs Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list Classes This option shows the class that your machine is in Click Add to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected class Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window copying This chapter gives you step by step instructions for copying documents This chapter includes e Basic copying e Changing the settings for each copy e Changing the default copy settings Z The supported setting options may differ according to your model Check your model name elt could be printed different color with fluorescent color due to the property of scanner Basic copying The following is the normal copy procedure for a machine without an Automatic Document Feeder ADF such as CLX 3185 and CLX 3185N 1 Place a single
187. hen your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax machine with which you are communicating does not support Super Fine resolution the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode supported by the other fax machine Photo Fax Originals containing shades of gray or photographs Faxing CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only 5 if The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job To change the default setting see Change Default on page 2 Darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the original document Press As Fax on the control panel 3S Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Darkness appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the option you want appears and press OK 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job To change the default setting see Change Default on page 2 oe NS Forwarding a fax to another destination You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax If you are out of office but have to receive the fax this feature may be useful Forwarding a sent fax to another destination You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to another destination 1 Press Ss Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until F
188. his device should be used more than 20 cm 8 inches from the body when wireless devices are on The power output of the wireless device or devices which may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the FCC This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Wireless devices are not user serviceable Do not modify them in any way Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it Contact manufacturer for service FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use A While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W cm2 may be exceeded at distances close to the antenna installed Therefore the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times This device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna T AB57 MnHcBa3snPoccnn CCC MUAHCBA3M Poccnn Germany only Das Ger t ist nicht fur die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV vorgesehen Turkey only e ROHS EEE Y netmeli ine Uygundur This EEE is compliant with RoHS
189. how Preview Checking this box allows you to preview applied scan options You can modify the options before scanning eDefault Allows you to go back to default options Scanning 5 Change Port tab Samsung CLX 3180 Series Property Local Scanner Set Scan Button Local Scanner Network Scanner O Auto detection on the network O IP Address IP Address A Location Cancel l Local Scanner Select when your machine is connected via USB port Network Scanner Select when your machine is connected via network port eAuto detection on the network Automatically detects your machine eIP or Host name Enter in your machine s IP address to detect your machine Scan Assistant When you press Quick Scan in Samsung Scan and Fax Manager the Scan Assistant window appears Scan Assistant allows you to adjust scan settings and start the scanning process In the Basic mode Scan settings and Preferences are available only If you want to use more settings press Advanced v Scan settings Scan sating mage type Aesolubon Documant size Document source F Proengt toe addional pages ig Pages lo scan v Preference FF Auto crop image after preview 7 Preview on program start FF Blank page detection iit eFavorites Allows you to save the current preferences settings for future use When you save Favorites all current scan settings are saved To use a saved setting sel
190. ials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE PRODUCT By installing copying downloading or using the SOFTWARE PRODUCT you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA If you do not agree to the terms of this EULA you may not install or use the SOFTWARE PRODUCT The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected by both copyright law and computer program protection laws 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Samsung grants you only the number of license that you purchase for using the software You cannot modify the Software or disable any licensing or control features of the Software ine Ot Kiko Ma B creme lo Ne wwe A few oe mm mb we wees mama mob alla maano Show She MUL accept the terms of the License Agreement The program searches for the machine iY If your machine is not connected to the computer the error Getting started_ 3 message appears Samsung CL X 3180 Serios L Welcome e P Lites Agreement Printers Not Pound 3 Searching Printers Piese canakuly need Ehe notice shout seach results kb Printers Mot Poured 4 natalilebion e 5 Final Setup war unable bo detect any mabagal bale ton bd printers Click Search agai or Dineh Input for assishanee bo find a prinber Maka T Glew gabie ham Baan dhoine nom au apu Ehe meh prevent cet Prom diarii ary printers Prete check Chee cables or check Help for more Fi wai D Check you sant bo insted the pahane weha connection of the prinber eAfter connecti
191. ick on the t3 icon third from left in the SetlP window to open the TCP IP configuration window Wireless network setup CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only 8 5 Enter the machine s new information into the configuration window as follows In a corporate intranet you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding TCP IP Configuration TCPAP Mac Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Cancel MAC Address Find the machine s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons For example 00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes 0015992951A8 eIP Address Enter a new IP address for your printer For example if your computer s IP address is 192 168 1 150 enter 192 168 1 X X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer s address Subnet Mask Enter a Subnet Mask eDefault Gateway Enter a Default Gateway 6 Click Apply and then click OK The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report Confirm that all the settings are correct 7 Click Exit to close the SetIP program 8 If necessary restart the computer s firewall IP setting using SetIP Program Macintosh For using SetIP program disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following 4 The path and Uls may differ by Macintosh OS version Refer to the Macintosh OS manual 1 Open System Preferences 2 Click Security
192. ifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canadian Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus ICES 003 of the Industry and Science Canada Cet appareil num rique respecte les limites de bruits radio lectriques applicables aux appareils numeriques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le mat riel brouilleur Appareils Num riques ICES 003 dict e par I Industrie et Sciences Canada Regulatory information_ 3 UNITED STATES OF AMERICA Russia only Federal Communications Commission FCC Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15 Low power Radio LAN type devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band may be present embedded in your printer system This section is only applicable if these devices are present Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm 8 inches separation between the device and the body for use of a wireless device near the body this does not include extremities T
193. ight arrow until Scan Feature appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until the scan type you want appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other settings 7 When you have finished press Stop Clear to return to ready mode a Changing the default scan settings To avoid having to customize the scan settings for each job you can set up default scan settings for each scan type 1 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ For CLX 3185 CLX 3185N and CLX 3185WK press Menu on the control panel For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW press 3 Scan and Menu in order on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until Scan Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Change Default appears 4 Press the left right arrow until the scan type you want appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears and press OK 6 Press the left right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK 7 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to change other settings 8 To change the default settings for other scan types press Back and repeat from step 5 9 Press Stop Clear to return mode m Setting up Address Book CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only You can set up address book
194. in your machine s memory 1 AoD Noa press OK Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Clear Setting appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the item you want to clear appears and Press OK when Yes appears to confirm clearing Repeat steps 4 through 5 to clear another item Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Option Description All settings Clears all of the data stored in memory and resets all of your settings to the factory default Fax Setup Restores all of the fax options to the factory default Copy Setup Restores all of the copy options to the factory default Machine status and advanced feature_ 3 Option Description Menu overview Restores all of the scan options to the factory The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine default or use the machine s functions These menus can be accessed by pressing Menu Scan Setup Restores all of the system options to the factory default Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine System Setup Network Setup Restores all of the network options to the factory default Items O
195. includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence Regulatory information 9 China only Pan PA KA INDIAN ARR E E ABA YIN BE AS BK INTER ZIRIKA Z IRIRA Ha ca Cr6 PBDE Jm MA El hal Fe ASE PCA HAS RE Be ae FEE BE ARR CCD WRA Fa ABE HE WRA ED Ai FEES BRIE PBA sO fe Se oe Se SS ba 3x os o o e 2 oo oo o o o o a SL fo Ca C CO C e e R O RRA HA KWEA SAE R E EKE SJT 11363 2006 PRELE HIIR ERKA F X KINANA BA R MMEDE
196. ine is connected to your computer and powered on Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the ADF For details about loading an original see Loading originals on page 1 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ For CLX 3185 CLX 3185N and CLX 3185WK press Scan to on the control panel For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW press 3 Scan on the control panel Press the left right arrow until Scan to PC appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Local PC appears and press OK iY If you see Not Available message check the port connection Press the left right arrow until the application program you want appears and press OK Default setting is My Documents Y To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved add or delete the application program in Samsung Scan and Fax Manager gt Properties gt Set Scan Button Press the left right arrow until the setting you want appears and press OK Resolution Sets the image resolution eScan Color Sets the color mode Scan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved Scan Size Sets the image size iY Scan Format appears only when you selected the Scan destination to My Documents elf you want to scan from the default setting press Start Scanning begins l4 eScanned image is saved in computer s My Documents gt My Pictures gt Samsung folder eYou can use
197. ing the number keypad You can enter alphanumeric characters using the number keypad and include special symbols by pressing the 1 button For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters see Entering characters using the number keypad CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only on page 2 Press OK to save the ID Press the left right arrow until Machine Fax No appears and press OK Enter your fax number using the number keypad and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode oP ae S ko Soe Sending a fax 1 Press lt amp Fax on the control panel 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See On the scanner glass on page 1 or In the document feeder CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only on page 1 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs See Adjusting the document settings on page 5 4 Enter the receiving fax machine s number You can use speed dial numbers or group dial numbers For details about storing and searching for a number see Setting up Address Book on page 6 5 Press Color Start or Black Start on the control panel The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinations 4 elf you want to send fax directly from your computer use Samsung Network PC Fax See Sending a fax Windows on page 1 eWhen you want to cancel a fax job press Stop Clear before the machine start transmission elf you used the sca
198. ing time using left right arrow or numeric keypad and press OK 11 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine Forwarding a sent fax to email address You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to another destination 1 Press Ss Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until E mail appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Send Forward appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until On appears and press OK Enter the sender s email address when From appears on the display and press OK 9 Enter the recipients email address when DestinationEmail appears on the display and press OK 10 Then the setting is saved 11 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email address Ka 2 ot ae a Forwarding a received fax to email address With this feature you can forward every fax you received to another destination When the machine receives a fax a fax is stored in the memory then the machine sends it to the destination you have set 1 Press Ss Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK Press the left right arro
199. ion 13 If an original is placed on the scanner glass select Yes to add another pages Load another original and press OK When you have finished select No at the Another Page prompt The machine returns to ready mode The display reminds you that you are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved in memory 1 Load the originals to be added and adjust document settings 2 Press Ss Fax on the control panel 3 Press Menu on the control panel 4 Press the left right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until Add Page appears and press OK 6 Press the left right arrow until the fax job you want appears and press OK When you have finished select No at the Another Page prompt The machine scans the original into memory 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Canceling a reserved delay fax job You can cancel the delayed fax job which is saved in memory 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press lt Fax on the control panel 3 Press the left right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until Cancel Job appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the fax job you want appears and press OK 6 Press OK when Yes appears The selected fax is deleted from memory 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Sen
200. ion about setting the paper type and size See Setting the paper size and type on page 6 Manual feeding in the tray To load different sizes of paper such as envelope transparency labels or custom sized paper you need to adjust the paper guides for manual feeding in the tray To use manual feeding in the tray you must adjust the paper length width guide properly Tips on using the manual feeding method elf you select Manual Feeder for Source from your software application you need to press the Color Start or Black Start button each time you print a page Load only one type size and weight of print media at a time in the tray eTo prevent paper jams do not add media while printing This also applies to other types of print media ePrint media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the tray first and be placed in the center of the tray Always load the use recommended print media only to avoid paper jams and print quality problems See Print media specifications on page 3 Flatten any curl on postcards envelopes and labels before loading them into the tray Printing on special media The media types are shown in the Printing Preferences This paper type option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray This setting appears in the list so that you can select it This will let you get the best quality printout If not the desired print quality may not be achieved e Plain Normal plai
201. ion speed Wireless Selects this option to use the wireless network See Wireless network setup CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only on page 1 Clear Setting Reverts the network settings to the default values Network Info This list shows information on your machine s network connection and configuration Machine status and advanced feature_ 4 Redial Term Prefix Dial ECM Mode Send Report Image TCR Receiving Receive Mode Ring To Answer Stamp RCV Name RCV Start Code Auto Reduction Discard Size Junk Fax Setup DRPD Mode Change Default Resolution Darkness Scan Size Auto Report Copy Feature Scan Size Reduce Enlarge Darkness Original Type Layout Adjust Bkgd Gray Enhance Eco Copy Items Option Items Option Copy Setup Change Default Scan Size Copies Copy Collation Reduce Enlarge Darkness Original Type Eco Copy System Setup Scan Feature USB Feature Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color Scan Format E mail Feature Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color Scan Setup Change Default USB Default E mail Default Machine Setup Machine ID Machine Fax No Date amp Time Clock Mode Language Default Mode Power Save Timeout Altitude Adj Auto Continue Import Setting Export Setting Paper Setup Paper Size Paper Type Sound Volume Key Sound Alarm Sound Speaker Ringer Report All Report Con
202. ire to the pin which is marked with the letter L or colored red You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug adaptor or at the distribution board Declaration of Conformity European Countries CE Approvals and Certifications The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93 68 EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated Hereby Samsung Electronics declare that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of CLX 3185 Series R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www samsung com printer go to Support gt Download center and enter your printer MFP name to browse the EuDoC January 1 1995 Council Directive 2006 95 EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment January 1 1996 Council Directive 2004 108 EC 92 31 EEC approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility March 9 1999 Council Directive 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity A full declaration defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co Ltd representative Regulatory information_ 6 EC Certification Certification to 1999 5 EC Radio Equipment amp
203. is not used and encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security Shared Key Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network eEncryption Select the encryption None WEP64 WEP128 eNetwork Key Enter the encryption network key value Confirm Network Key Confirm the encryption network key value WEP Key Index If you are using the WEP Encryption select the appropriate WEP Key Index K The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network has security setting The wireless network security window appears Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next eWEP Wired Equivalent Privacy is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64 bit or 128 bit WEP encryption key 16 The window which shows the wireless network setting appears Check the settings and click Next K Before entering the IP address for the machine you must know the computer s network configuration information If the computer s network configuration is set to DHCP the wireless network setting should also be DHCP Likewise if the computer s network configuration is set to Static the wireless network setting should also be Static If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network setting you must contact the netwo
204. iving mode should be set to fax e Make sure that there is paper in the tray e Check to see if the display shows any error message If it does clear the problem File in Use message appears during installation Exit all software applications Remove all software from the printer s startup group then restart Windows Reinstall the printer driver The machine does not send e Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass e Check the fax machine you are sending to to see if it can receive your fax General Protection Fault Exception OE Spool 32 or Illegal Operation messages appear Close all other applications reboot Windows and try printing again Troubleshooting 15 Condition Suggested solutions Fail To Print A printer timeout error occurred messages appear These messages may appear during printing Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing If the message appears in standby mode or after printing has been completed check the connection and or whether an error has occurred Common Linux problems condition Suggested solutions 4 Refer to the Microsoft Windows User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages The machine does not print e Check if the printer driver is installed in your system Open Unified Driver Co
205. k soaked cloth ribbon against the paper much like a typewriter DPI Dots Per Inch DPI is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing Generally higher DPI results in a higher resolution more visible detail in the image and a larger file size DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers Duplex A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print or scan on both sides of the paper A printer equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle Duty Cycle Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year The lifespan means the average capacity of print outs usually within the warranty period For example if the duty cycle is 48 000 pages per month assuming 20 working days a printer limits 2 400 pages a day ECM Error Correction Mode ECM is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another An emulator duplicates the functions of one
206. lation process For CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK click Cancel to go to the next step For CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW select your machine name from the Printer Name list and click Create When the confirmation window appears click OK 15 Click Continue on the Read Me window 16 After the installation is finished click Restart i If the printer driver does not work properly uninstall the driver and reinstall it Follow the steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh a Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on b Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive c Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop d Double click the MAC Installer folder e Double click the Installer OS X icon f Enter the password and click OK g The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue h Read the license agreement and click Continue i Click Agree to agree to the license agreement j Select Uninstall and click Uninstall k When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears click Continue l When the uninstall is done click Quit Linux You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software http www samsung com printer Follow the steps below to install the software Installing the Unified Linux Driver 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 When
207. left right arrow until the application program you want appears and press OK Default setting is My Documents K To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved add or delete the application program in Samsung Scan and Fax Manager gt Properties gt Set Scan Button 8 Press the left right arrow until the setting you want appears and press OK eResolution Sets the image resolution eScan Color Sets the color mode eScan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved eScan Size Sets the image size IZ Scan Format appears only when you selected the Scan destination to My Documents elf you want to scan from the default setting press Start 9 Scanning begins fH Scanned image is saved in computer s My Documents gt My Pictures gt Samsung folder eYou can use Twain driver to scan quickly in Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program eYou can also scan by pressing Window s Start gt Control Panel gt Samsung Scan and Fax Manager gt Quick Scan Scanning by a network connection Scan to Email CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only If you have connected your machine to a network and set up network parameters correctly you can scan and send images over the network Setting up an e mail account To scan and send an image as an email attachment You need to set up network parameters using SyncThru Web Service 1 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go t
208. lick the Basic tab select Booklet Printing from the Type drop down list 3 Click the Paper tab select the Size Source and Type IZ The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes In order to find out the available paper size for this feature select the available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab If you select an unavailable paper size this option can be automatically canceled Select only available paper paper without Ad Or amp mark 4 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 5 After printing fold and staple the pages Printing on both sides of the paper Manual You can print on both sides of a paper duplex Before printing decide how you want your document oriented You can use this feature with Letter Legal A4 US Folio or Oficio sized paper See Print media specifications on page 3 We recommend not to print on both sides of special media such as labels envelopes or thick paper It may cause a paper jam or damage the machine 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Advance tab Printing 3 3 From the Double Sided Printing Manual section select the binding option you want None Long Edge This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding 4 Click the Paper tab select the Size Source and Type 5 Click OK or Print until y
209. loadable You can download useful software programs from the Samsung website software e Samsung AnyWeb Print helps personal users to screen capture the website screen in Windows Internet Explorer easily http solution samsungprinter com personal anywebprint e SyncThru Web Admin Service provides convenient tools for network administrators who need to manage many machines simultaneously This program is for network model only http solution samsungprinter com e Samsung Easy Color Manager helps Samsung color laser printer users to adjust color as they like http solution samsungprinter com personal colormanager About this user s guide 2 features of your new product Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print Special Features INYO Me N E Me PA A gU CC i Print with excellent quality and speed e You can print with a full range of colors using cyan magenta yellow and black e You can print with a resolution of up to 2400 x 600 dpi effective output e Your machine prints A4 sized paper at up to 16 ppm and Letter sized paper at up to 17 ppm In the color mode your machine prints A4 sized or Letter sized paper at up to 4 ppm Handle many different types of printable material e The 130 sheet tray supports plain paper in various sizes letterhead envelopes labels custom
210. lue KHA screen button CLX 3185 only In case of print the active windows displayed in the monitor 1 Press Print Screen on the control panel 2 Press OK when Active appears The machine prints the active windows displayed in the monitor e n case of print the whole monitor screen 1 Press Print Screen on the control panel 2 Press OK when Full appears The machine prints the whole monitor screen Z The page will be printed on the default page like A4 or Letter eYou can only use this function with a USB connected machine e Print Screen can only be used with Windows and Macintosh operating systems eYou can only use this function if the machine driver is installed Eco Copy button CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN only The Eco Copy function cuts toner consumption and paper usage You can configure Eco Copy function to adjust your paper savings and save setting you want to use 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until Copy Setup appears and press OK Introduction_ 8 3 Press OK when Change Default appears Press the left right arrow until Eco Copy appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow to select the mode you want Mono Only prints all original images in black and white mode 2up Mono prints two original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of paper in black and white mode 4up Mono prints four original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of paper in black and white mode 2up
211. m error has occurred Turn the power button off and on If the problem persists call a service representative Error error number Turn off then on A system error has occurred Turn the power button off and on If the problem persists call a service representative Install Toner y The toner cartridge is installed improperly or not installed Reinstall the toner cartridge two or three times to confirm it is seated properly If the problem persists the toner cartridge is not being detected Contact the service representatives facing down resumes printing Paper Empty There is no paper in Load paper in tray 1 See in Tray1 tray 1 Loading paper in the tray on page 4 Paper jam Paper has jammed in Clear the jam See In in exit area the paper exit area the paper exit area on page 4 Paper jam Paper has jammed in Clear the jam See In in Tray 1 the Tray 1 area the tray on page 3 Paper jam Paper has jammed Clear the jam See In inside machine inside the machine the fuser unit area on page 3 Prepare IMG unit v The estimated life of imaging unit is close Prepare a imaging unit for replacement See Available supplies on page 1 Memory Full Remove Job The memory is full Press the left right arrow to highlight Cancel or Start then press OK If you select Cancel the machine stops the fax job If you select Start the machine only s
212. machine does not print PDF file correctly Some graphics text or illustrations are missing Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Printing the PDF file as an image may solve this problem Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options iY It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image The print quality of photos is not good Images are not clear The resolution of the photo is very low Reduce the photo size If you increase the photo size in the software application the resolution will be reduced Before printing the machine emits vapor near the output tray Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing This is not a problem Just keep printing Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The printed paper is curled Paper curl occurs due to many different factors such as temperature humidity paper type high coverage printing etc Use the Paper Curl Reduction option Go to Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 click Advanced tab and click the Paper Curl Reduction check box This option will optimize environmental factors to reduce the paper curl level The printed billing paper is curled The paper type setting does not match Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click Paper tab and set type to Thick See Op
213. mation about the how to connect the machine SNMP Community Name If your system administrator set the new SNMP Community Name on the machine you can find the machine in the network Contact your system administrator for new SNMP Community Name The searched machine will be shown on the screen Select the one you wish to use and click OK l4 If the driver searched only one machine the confirmation window appears After the installation is finished a window asking you to print a test page appears If you want to print a test page click Print a test page Otherwise just click Next and go to step 8 Network setup CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only _ 4 7 Ifthe test page prints out correctly click Yes If not click No to reprint it 8 Toregister as a user of the machine in order to receive information from Samsung website click On line Registration i If your machine is not connected yet to the network click How to connect How to connect gives detailed information about the how to connect the machine Follow the instructions in the window 9 Click Finish Z eAfter the driver setup is completed you may enable firewall elf your printer driver does not work properly follow the step below to repair or reinstall the driver a Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on b From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt your printer
214. n about supplies driver update registration and so on click appropriate buttons Using special print features Special print features include the followings e Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper on page 3 e Printing posters on page 3 e Printing booklets Manual on page 3 e Printing on both sides of the paper Manual on page 3 e Change percentage of your document on page 4 e Fitting your document to a selected paper size on page 4 e Using watermarks on page 4 e Using overlay on page 5 e Advanced Options on page 5 Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper To print more than one page per sheet the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Basic tab select Multiple Pages per Side in the Type drop down list 3 Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet 2 4 6 9 or 16 in the Pages per Side drop down list 4 Select the page order from the Page Order drop down list if necessary 5 Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet 6 Click the Paper tab select the Size Source and Type 7 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Prin
215. n cause paper curl See Selecting print media on page 2 Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray Character Voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black If you are using transparencies try another type of transparency Because of the composition of transparencies some character voids are normal You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper Remove the paper and turn it over The paper may not meet paper specifications See Selecting print media on page 2 Wrinkles or creases AaBbCc Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Check the paper type and quality See Selecting print media on page 2 Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear The toner cartridge may be installed improperly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it The toner cartridge may be defective Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 If the problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Troubleshooting 13 Condition Suggested Solutions Condition Suggested solution Curl AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc WA C If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed int
216. n paper Select this type if your printing on 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ibs e Thick 90 to 105 g m 24 to 28 Ibs thick paper e Thin 60 to 70 g m 16 to 19 Ibs thin paper e Cotton 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ibs cotton paper e Color 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ibs color backgrounded paper e Preprinted 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ibs preprinted letterhead paper Envelope 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ibs envelope e Recycled 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ibs recycled paper When you use recycled paper printouts might be wrinkled and or jamming may occur due to excessive curl e Transparency 0 104 to 0 124 mm 0 004094 to 0 004882 inches thickness of transparency paper e Labels 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 Ibs labels e CardStock 105 to 163 g m 28 to 43 Ibs cardstock Bond 105 to 120 g m 28 to 32 Ibs bond Media and tray_ 4 e Archive 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ibs If you need to keep the print out for a long time such as for archives select this option e Glossy Photo 111 to 220 g m 30 to 58 Ibs glossy photo paper See Print media specifications on page 3 e Matte Photo 111 to 220 g m 30 to 58 Ibs matte photo paper See Print media specifications on page 3 Envelopes Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes To print an envelope the stamp area is on the left side and the end of the envelope with the stamp area enters the printer first e When selecting envelopes
217. n the User Account Control windows Select Install Now IT ea Install Now F View User s Guide p gt Y Wireless Setting and Installation p Advanced Installation Installation Language English If necessary select a language from the drop down list 4 For CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FW you can access Wireless Setting and Installation menu The Wireless Setting and Installation allows you to install a wireless network to connect to the machine with a USB cable See Setting a wireless network with USB cable on page 3 The Advanced Installation has two options Custom Installation and Install Software Only The Custom Installation allows you to select the machine s connection and choose individual component to install The Install Software Only allows you to install the supplied software such as Smart Panel Follow the instruction on the window Read License Agreement and select accept the terms of the License Agreement Then click Next The program searches for the machine iH If your machine is not found in the network or locally the error message appears i Samsung CL X 3180 Serios L Welcome P binene Agmeemenl Pointers Not Pound Please Conefully read Ehe notice about search nesulks 3 Searching Printers Setup wae unable bo detect any mabagal bale conmected printers Click Search again or Tweet Inge hor askance be find a piber Niobe T thy cabia han Baan dhoi
218. n turn on the display Then the machine tries to re connect to the wireless network Re connecting to a wireless network in PBC mode If you press the WPS O button on the control panel when the wireless function is off the machine automatically tries to re connect to the access point or wireless router with the previously used wireless connection settings and address 1 Connecting If you press the WPS O button on the control panel when the wireless function is off the machine automatically tries to re connect to the access point or wireless router with the previously used wireless connection settings and address 2 Connected When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network the blue wireless LED light stays on AP SSID After completing the wireless network connection process AP s SSID information appears on the display IZ If there is no previously used access point or wireless router or the network settings have been changed the Connecting Failed and the Wait 2 minutes for Reconnecting messages appear in turn on the display and then the machine tries to re connect to the wireless network After the second attempt to Wireless network setup CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only 2 connect the machine stops the wireless connection function if the machine fails to get the wireless connection Try again to connect to the wireless network after solving the connection problem Canceling a wireless net
219. nctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to use a Single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers The particular number someone uses to call you is identified by different ringing patterns which consist of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds This feature is often used by answering services who answer telephones for many different clients and need to know which number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD feature your fax machine can learn the ring pattern you designate to be answered Unless you change it this ringing pattern will continue to be recognized and Faxing CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only _ 4 answered as a fax call and all other ringing patterns will be forwarded to the extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket You can easily suspend or change DRPD at any time Before using the DRPD option Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company To set up DRPD you will need another telephone line at your location or someone available to dial your fax number from outside To set up the DRPD mode 1 Press Ss Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until Fax Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Receiving appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Receive
220. nd point to another WIA Windows Imaging Architecture WIA is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA compliant scanner WPA Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a class of systems to secure wireless Wi Fi computer networks which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP WPA PSK WPA PSK WPA Pre Shared Key is special mode of WPA for small business or home users A shared key or password is configured in the wireless access point WAP and any wireless laptop or desktop devices WPA PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security WPS The Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS is a standard for establishing a wireless home network If your wireless access point supports WPS you can configure the wireless network connection easily without a computer XPS XML Paper Specification XPS is a specification for a Page Description Language PDL and a new document format which has benefits for portable document and electronic document developed by Microsoft It is an XML based specification based on a new print path and a vector based device independent document format index A address book 6 answering machine fax 4 authentication printing a report 3 B back 3 6 booklet printing 3 booklets 3 buttons eco copy 8 menu 3
221. ne norm pau aapakan Bhai megh prevent oats Prom lacli Air printers Prete check Che cables or check Help for more information Cl check t vou man ho iniba tha forbes wihi connection of the piri Search again Direct input Help SHEP Ciy H eCheck if you want to install the software without connection of the printer Check this option to install this program without a machine connected In this case the print a test page window will be skipped and completes the installation eSearch again When you press this button the firewall notice window appears Turn off the firewall and Search again For Windows operating system click Start gt Control Panel gt Windows Firewall and inactivate this option Turn off the firewall from the third party s program beside the operating system Refer to the manual provided by individual programs eDirect Input The Direct Input allows you to search a specific machine on the network Search by IP address Enter the IP address or the host name Then click Next To verify your machine s IP address print a network configuration report See Printing a network configuration report on page 2 Search by network path To find a shared machine UNC Path enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button Then click Next eHelp If your machine is not connected to the computer or network this help button gives detailed infor
222. nel 2 Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until Paper Type appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow to select the paper type you want 6 Press OK to save the selection 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode From your computer Windows 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 For Windows 2000 select Settings gt Printers For Windows XP Server 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows Server 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 3 Right click on your machine 4 For Windows XP Server 2003 Server 2008 Vista press Printing Preferences For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 select the Printing Preferences from context menu iH If Printing Preferences item has a B mark you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer 5 Click Paper tab 6 Select options such as paper size and type 7 Press OK Z If you want to use special sized paper such as a billing paper select Paper tab gt Size gt Edit in the Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 Macintosh Macintosh users need to change the default setting manually e
223. ner to work at any time For example while acquisition is in progress on the first scanner you may select the second scanner set the device options and start the image acquisition simultaneously Click Properties Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 1 From the Scanner Properties window click Preview The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the Preview Pane 7 Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview 8 Pane Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area sections Image Quality This option allows you to select the color composition and the scan resolution for the image Scan Area This option allows you to select the page size The Advanced button enables you to set the page size manually If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings select the option from the Job Type drop down list See Adding Job Type Settings on page 8 Click Default to restore the default setting for the scan options 9 When you have finished click Scan to start scanning The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the progress of the scan To cancel scanning click Cancel 10 The scanned image appears If you want to edit the scanned image use the toolbar See Using the Image Manager on page 8 11 When you are finished click Sa
224. network connectivity and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization s information or operations with its employees Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service the internal website IP address An Internet Protocol IP address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard IPM The Images Per Minute IPM is a way of measuring the speed of a printer An IPM rate indicates the number of single sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute IPP The Internet Printing Protocol IPP defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs media size resolution and so forth IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers and also supports access control authentication and encryption making ita much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones IPX SPX IPX SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP IP with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP and SPX having similarities to TCP IPX SPX was primarily designed for local area networks LANs and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose typically its performance exceeds that of TCP IP on a LAN ISO
225. nfigurator and switch to the Printers tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list If not open Add new printer wizard to set up your device e Check if the machine is started Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list Look at the description in the Selected printer pane If its status contains Stopped string press the Start button After that normal operation of the machine should be restored The stopped status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred For instance this could be an attempt to print a document when the port is claimed by a scanning application e Ensure the port is not busy Since functional components of machine printer and scanner share the same O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other user will encounter device busy response You should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your machine In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should either wait for completion of the current job or press the Release port button if you are sure that the present application is not functioning properl
226. ng the machine click Next elf you do not want to connect the machine at this time click the check box next to Check if you want to install the software without connection of the printer In this case Print a test page window will be skipped and installation is completed The installation window in this User s Guide may differ depending on the machine and interface in use 5 The searched machines will be shown on the screen Select the one you wish to use and click Next IZ If the driver searched only one machine the confirmation window appears 6 After the installation is finished a window asking you to print a test page appears If you want to print a test page click Print a test page Otherwise just click Next and go to step 8 7 Ifthe test page prints out correctly click Yes If not click No to reprint it 8 If you want to register your machine on Samsung website click On line Registration l4 If your machine is not connected yet to the computer click How to connect How to connect gives you the detailed information about how to connect the machine Follow the instructions in the window 9 Click Finish Z If the printer driver does not work properly follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver a Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on b From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt your printer driver name gt Maintenance
227. ng to the machine CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only e SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses OPERATING SYSTEM CPU RAM free HDD space Windows Intel Pentium 400 64 MB 600 MB 2000 MHz Pentium III 933 128 MB MHz Windows XP Intel Pentium IIl 933 128 MB 1 5 GB MHz Pentium IV 1 GHz 256 MB Windows Intel Pentium IIl 933 128 MB 1 25 GB to Server 2003 MHz Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB 2 GB Windows Intel Pentium IV 1 512 MB 10 GB Server 2008 GHz Pentium IV 2 GHz 2 GB Windows Intel Pentium IV 3 512 MB 15 GB Vista GHz 1 GB Windows 7 Intel Pentium IV 1 1 GB 16 GB GHz 32 bit or 64 bit 2 GB processor or higher e Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory to enable the Aero theme e DVD R W Drive Windows Intel Pentium IV 1 512 MB 10 GB Server 2008 GHz x86 or 1 4 GHz 2 GB R2 x64 processors 2 GHz or faster Unified Linux Driver Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine s features e SANE Use this driver to scan documents e Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing e SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses Linux K eInternet Explorer 5 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems Users who have an administrator right can install the software Windows Termin
228. nion or associated areas if a CE mark with CE a Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European Commission through the R amp TTE directive European States qualified under wireless approvals EU Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France with frequency restrictions Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Luxembourg Malta The Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden and the U K EEA EFTA countries Iceland Liechtenstein Norway and Switzerland European States with restrictions on use EU In France the frequency range is restricted to 2446 5 2483 5 MHz for devices above 10 mW transmitting power such as wireless EEA EFTA countries No limitations at this time Regulatory information_ 7 Regulatory Compliance Statements Wireless Guidance Low power Radio LAN type devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band may be present embedded in your printer system The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device Additional limitations cautions and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections or country group sections The wireless devices in your system a
229. nished click OK or Print until you exit the Print window To stop printing the watermark select None from the Watermark drop down list Editing a watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears 3 Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options 4 Click Update to save the changes 5 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Printing_ 4 Deleting a watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears 3 Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete 4 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Using overlay An overlay is content you store on your hard disk drive that can be superimposed over any document you print An overlay is often used to take the place of letterhead paper Rather than using preprinted letterhead you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead To print a letter with your company s letterhead you do not need to load
230. nner glass the machine shows the message asking to place another page Sending a fax manually This method is sending a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel 1 Press Ss Fax on the control panel 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs See Adjusting the document settings on page 5 4 Press On Hook Dial on the control panel or lift the handset 5 Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel 6 Press Color Start or Black Start when you hear a high pitched fax signal from the remote fax machine When you want to cancel a fax job press Stop Clear at any time while sending Confirming a transmission When the last page of your original has been sent successfully the machine beeps and returns to ready mode When something goes wrong while sending your fax an error message appears on the display You must treat the malfunction according to the error messages on the display See Understanding display messages on page 5 for a list of error messages and their meanings If you receive an error message press Stop Clear to clear the message and try to send the fax again You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each time sending a fax is completed See Printing sent fax report automatically on page 8 Automatic redialing When the num
231. not be used Green Blinking e When the green LED slowly blinks the machine is receiving data from a computer e When the green LED blinks rapidly the machine is printing data On The machine is on line and can be used Blue On When the machine is connected to a wireless network Wireless LED lights on blue CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only Red Blinking e Aminor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared Check the display message When the problem is cleared the machine resumes See Understanding display messages on page 5 e Asmall amount of toner is left in the cartridge The estimated cartridge life of toner is close Prepare a new cartridge for replacement You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner See Redistributing toner on page 1 On e Atoner cartridge has almost reached the end of its estimated cartridge life It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 e A paper jam has occurred See Clearing paper jams on page 2 e The door is opened Close the door e There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray e The machine has stopped due to a major error Check the display message See Understanding display messages on page 5 A Samsung does not recommend using a non genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as one that is refilled or remanufactured Samsung
232. not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine s fusing temperature for 0 1 second Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature about 170 C 338 F e Letterhead Preprinted paper ink must be non flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers e Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage e Before you load letterhead preprinted paper verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off preprinted paper reducing print quality Glossy photo if Load one paper to the tray at a time facing glossy side up e Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine It could cause damage to the machine Matte photo l4 Load one paper in the tray at a time side to be printed facing up Setting the paper size and type After loading paper in the paper tray set the paper size and type using the control panel These settings will apply to copy and scan modes For computer printing select the paper size and type in the application program you use on your computer See Opening printing preferences on page 2 IZ The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the control panel nig the paper size Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Paper Setup appear
233. nswer several different telephone numbers In this menu you can set the machine to recognize which ring patterns to answer For details about this feature see Receiving faxes using DRPD mode on page 4 Change Default Option Description Resolution Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received document e Standard Originals with normal sized characters e Fine Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals printed using a dot matrix printer e Super Fine Originals containing extremely fine detail Super Fine mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution YH For memory transmission Super Fine mode is not available The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine eWhen your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax machine with which you are communicating does not support Super Fine resolution the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode supported by the other fax machine e Photo Fax Originals containing shades of gray or photographs Darkness You can select the default contrast mode to fax your originals lighter or darker Scan Size You can select the size of original Auto Report You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the previous 50 communication operations including time and dates For further
234. nter with the protective cover removed from Laser Scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes When using this product these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons CAUTION CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM DANGER LASER RADIATION AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM DANGER RADIATIONS INVISIBLES DU LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EVITER TOUTE EXPOSITION DIRECTE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ATTENZIONE RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBILE IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUCION RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO PERIGO RADIAGAO LASER INVISIVEL AO ABRIR EVITE EXPOSICAO DIRECTA AO FEIXE GEVAAR ONZICHTBARE LASERSTRALEN BIJ GEOPENDE KLEP DEZE KLEP NIET OPENEN ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRALNING VED ABNING UNDGA UDSAETTELSE FOR STRALNING ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DEKSEL APNES UNNGA EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN VARNING OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL AR OPPEN STRALEN AR FARLIG VAROITUS NAKYMATONTA LASERSATEILYA AVATTAESSA VARO SUORAA ALTISTUMISTA SATEELLE jt Fami USAKtEha FT 0 HS SH jojy 584 YLen FOSAS Ozone Safety During normal operation this machine produces ozone The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator How
235. nux distribution CD or Gimp Front end application If you wish to use another kind of scan application refer to application s Help The machine does e Ensure a document is loaded into the not scan machine ensure your machine is connected to the computer e If there is an I O error while scanning l4 Refer to the Linux User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages Common Macintosh problems encounter the Cannot open port device file error when printing a document Avoid changing print job parameters via LPR GUI for example while a print job is in progress Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port while printing the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs If this situation occurs try to release the port by selecting Release port in Port configuration window condition Suggested solutions The machine does Printing the PDF file as an image may enable not print PDF files the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the correctly Some Acrobat printing options parts of graphics 7 text or illustrations K It will take longer to print when you print a Aa PDF file as an image are missing The machine does not appear on the scanners list e Ensure y
236. o appears and press OK d Press the left right arrow until Yes appears and press OK 4 Select Start gt Control Panel gt Printers and Faxes 5 Click Add a printer on the left pane of the Printers and Faxes windows 6 Click Add a local printer on the Add Printer windows 7 The Add Printer Wizard window appears Follow the instruction on the window Z If the machine does not work in the network environment activate IPv6 Refer to the next section followed by Activating IPv6 The machine is provided with IPv6 feature on Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until Network appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until TCP IP IPv6 appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until IPv6 Activate appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until On appears and press OK Turn the machine off and turn it on again Reinstall your printer driver fe eS Setting IPv6 addresses Machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements e Link local Address Self configured local Pv6 address Address starts with FE80 e Stateless Address Automatically configured Pv6 address by a network router e Stateful Address Pv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server e Manual Address Manually configured IPv6 address by a user DHCPv6 address configuration Stateful If you have a DHCPV6 server on your network you can set one of the following option for def
237. o the following tasks e You can configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments e You can customize machine settings See Using SyncThru Web Service CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only on page 1 SyncThru Web Admin Service Web based machine management solution for network administrators SyncThru Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access Download this program from http solution samsungprinter com SetIP This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP IP protocol See IPv4 setting using SetIP Program Windows on page 2 e See IPv4 setting using SetIP Program Macintosh on page 3 e See IPv4 setting using SetIP Program Linux on page 3 4 TCP IPv6 is not supported by this program Using a wired network You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your network This chapter will show you how this is easily accomplished Network setup CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only _ 1 You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding port on your machine 228 a a 5 i in ma OF Printing a network configuration rep
238. o access the SyncThru Web Service website 2 Click Login on the upper right of the website The Login window appears 3 Type in the ID and Password and then click Login If it is your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password ID admin ePassword sec00000 4 Move the mouse cursor on the Settings of the top menu bar and then click Network Settings 5 Click Outgoing Mail Server SMTP on the left pane of the website 6 Enter the SMTP server domain name or the IP address dotted decimal notation you want to use on the SMTP Server text box l4 Only alphabet letters number 0 9 period and hyphen are permitted in these text boxes 7 Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 on Port Number text box The default port number is 25 8 Select SMTP Requires Authentication check box in the SMTP Login Information section 9 Enter the login ID on the Login ID text box and the password on the Password text box 10 Enter the password one more time on the Confirm Password to confirm your choice 11 Click Apply 4 If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP select the SMTP requires POP3 Before SMTP Authentication check box a Enter the POP3 server domain name on the POP3 Server input field and the port number from 1 to 65535 on the Port Number text boxes respectively The default port number is 110 b Enter the login ID on the Login ID text
239. o the machine e Turn over the stack of paper in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray e Change the printer option and try again Go to printer properties click Paper tab and set type to Thin Paper See Opening printing preferences on page 2 Toner cartridge produces fewer copies than expected before running out of toner Your originals may contain pictures solids or heavy lines For example your originals may be forms newsletters books or other documents that use more toner The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made Turn the machine off and back on An unknown image repetitively appears on a few sheets or loose toner light print or contamination occurs Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1 000 m 3 281 ft or above The high altitude may affect the print quality such as loose toner or light imaging You can select a correct altitude of your machine location See Altitude adjustment on page 1 Scanning problems Condition Suggested solutions Copying problems Condition Suggested solution Copies are too light or too dark Use Darkness in Copy feature to lighten or darken the backgrounds of copies See Changing the settings for each copy on page 1 Smears lines marks or spots appear on copies e Ifthe defects are on the original use Darkness in Copy feature to lighten the backgroun
240. oftware If you want to scan documents using other software you will need to use TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN compliant software 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 1 3 Open an application such as Adobe Photoshop Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options 5 Scan and save your scanned image gt Scanning using the WIA driver Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition WIA driver for scanning images WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows XP and works with digital cameras and scanners Unlike the TWAIN driver the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust images without using additional software The WIA driver works only on Windows XP Vista with a USB port Windows XP 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 1 3 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Scanners and Cameras 4 Double click your scanner driver icon The Scanner and Camera wizard appears 5 Click Next 6 Set the option in Choose scanning preferences windo
241. olor channel registration in color printing mode eRGB Color You can adjust the appearance of images by changing the settings in the RGB Color option Screen This option allows you to select options to convert continuous tone image into printable binary image Color Adjust You can adjust the image by changing the settings in the Color Adjust option Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper This feature provides a cost effective way to print draft pages 1 2 Open an application and select Print from the File menu Select Layout from the drop down list In the Pages per Sheet drop down list select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper Printer am Presets Standard a Copies PM Collated C Two Sided Pages All QO From 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 sd 20 99 by 29 70 om Orientation o Layout ka Pages per Sheet 6 4 Layout Direction zl S ni N tofi Border None H Two Sided Off tH Reverse Page Orientation Fr Suspies Cancel im Select the other options you want to use Click Print then the machine prints the selected number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper Linux printing Printing 7 Printing from applications There are several Linux applications that allow you to print using the Common UNIX Printing System CUPS You can print using any of these applications
242. on Description Sent Report This report shows information on the faxes you have recently sent You can set the machine to automatically print this report every 50 communications See Sending on page 1 Fax RCV Report This report shows information on the faxes you have recently received Schedule Jobs This list shows the documents currently stored for delayed faxes along with the starting time and type of each operation JunkFax Report This list shows the fax numbers specified as Junk fax numbers To add or delete numbers to or from this list access the Junk Fax Setup menu See Receiving on page 1 Network Info This list shows information on your machine s network connection and configuration User Auth List This list shows authorized users who are allowed to use the email function PCL Font List This list shows all the PCL fonts currently available to your machine Fax Option This list shows the status of the user selectable options for fax You may print this list to confirm your changes after changing fax settings i You can also print the machine s status information and browse status with SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser on your network connected computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Information gt Print information Clearing memory You can selectively clear information stored
243. on This operation automatically detects whether the scanned image is blank or not Delete page Blank pages will be deleted at the end of the scanning process Separate files Blank page will work as a scan job separator That is when multiple pages are scanned at once a blank page will divide scanned image sequence into parts Each part will be treated as a separate document group Start from scanner If this option is checked scanning process is managed using scanner touch screen rather than from the computer The option is not available for some scanner models Advanced In the Advanced mode additional options such as Image Adjustment Image Enhancement and Additional Settings are available Image Adjustment Allows you to perform some transformations of the scanned image These transformations include automatic adjustment of image size straightening and rotation Image Enhancement Allows you to remove various defects of the image and improve its quality Additional settings Allows special processing of scanned images These transformations include stitching several partial image scans into a single image processing of scanned books and watermark stamping 4 Click the Help button from the lower left corner of the window and click on any option you want to Know about Then a pop up window appears with information about that option s feature which is provided from the Scan Assistant Scanning with TWAIN enabled s
244. on report e Check whether access point or wireless router has a configured security password If it has a password refer to the access point or wireless router administrator e Check whether the machine s IP address Reinstall the machine driver and change the settings to connect to the machine on the network Due to the characteristics of DHCP the allocated IP address could change if the machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset e Check the wireless environment You might not be able to connect to the network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type ina user s information before connecting to access point or wireless router e This machine only supports IEEE 802 11 b g n and Wi Fi Other wireless communication Bluetooth is not supported e When using the Ad hoc mode for operating systems such as Windows Vista you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use the wireless machine e You cannot use infrastructure mode and Ad hoc mode at the same time for Samsung wireless network machine e The machine is within the range of the wireless network For most networks the machine should be within 30 meters 100 feet of the wireless access point or wireless router e The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless signal Remove any large metal objects between the access point or wireless router and the machine Make sure the m
245. ontinue 10 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement 11 Select Easy Install and click Install Easy Install is recommended for most users All components necessary for machine operations will be installed If you select Custom Install you can choose individual operations will be installed 12 When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears click Continue 13 Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option and then click OK 14 The software searches the wireless network Z If the searching has failed you may check if the USB cable is connected between the computer and machine properly and follow the instruction on the window 15 After searching the wireless network a list of wireless network your machine has searched appears If you want to use the Samsung default ad hoc setting select the last wireless network on the list which Network Name SSID is portthru and Link Quality is Printer Self Network Then click Next If you want to use other ad hoc settings select other wireless network from the list IZ lf you cannot find out the network name you want to choose or if you want to set the ad hoc configuration manually click Advanced Setting Enter the wireless Network Name Type in the SSID name you want SSID is case sensitive Operation Mode Select Ad hoc Channel Select the channel eAuthentication Select an authentication type Open System Authentication
246. opy job 1 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ For CLX 3185 and CLX 3185N press Menu on the control panel For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW press 9 Copy and Menu in order on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Original Type appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the image mode you want appears and press OK eText Photo Use for originals with mixed text and photographs ePhoto Use when the originals are photographs Magazine Use when the originals are the form of magazine eText Use for originals containing mostly text 5 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode bad Reduced or enlarged copy You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25 to 400 when you copy original documents from the scanner glass To select from the predefined copy sizes 1 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ For CLX 3185 and CLX 3185N press Menu on the control panel For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW press 93 Copy and Menu in Copying 1 order on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Reduce Enlarge appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the size setting you want appears and press OK 5 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode To scale the copy by directly entering the
247. or Notification Area in Linux Windows 5 Double click this icon in Windows Linux FX Click this icon in Linux Or if you are a Windows user you can launch it from the Start menu select Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt your printer driver name gt Smart Panel l4 elf you have already installed more than one Samsung machine first select the correct machine model you want in order to access the corresponding Smart Panel Right click in Windows or Linux the Smart Panel icon and select your machine The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this user s guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use In case of Mac OS 10 3 1 Click System Preferences gt Print 4 Fax 2 Click Set up Printers 3 Select printer in list and double click it 4 Click Utility In case of Mac OS 10 4 1 Click System Preferences gt Print 4 Fax 2 Select printer in list and click Printer Queue 3 Click Utility In case of Mac OS 10 5 1 Click System Preferences gt Print 4 Fax 2 Select printer in list and click Open Printer Queue 3 Click Utility In case of Mac OS 10 6 1 Click System Preferences gt Print 4 Fax 2 Select printer in list and click Open Printer Queue Management tools 2 3 Click Printer Setup gt Utility tab gt Open Printer Utility The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the machine the estimated level of toner rem
248. ories_ 4 6 Insert the new container into position and then push it to make sure that itis firmly seated in place 7 Close the front door firmly A If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate Please make sure all toner cartridges are installed properly If any toner cartridge is installed improperly the front door do not close 8 Turn the machine on Supplies and accessories_ 5 specifications This chapter covers the machine s primary specifications This chapter includes e Hardware specifications e Environmental specifications e Electrical specifications e Print media specifications l4 The specification values are listed below specifications are subject to change without notice See www samsung com printer for possible changes in information Hardware specifications Item Description Dimensions Height e CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK 310 mm 12 2 inches e CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW 344 mm 13 5 inches Depth e CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK 378 mm 14 9 inches e CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW 378 mm 14 9 inches Width e CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK 416 mm 16 4 inches e CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW 416 mm 16 4 inches Weight Machine with consumables e CLX 3185 CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK 14 24 Kg 31 39 Ibs e CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW 15 25 Kg 33 62 Ibs Environmental specifications Item Description Noise Level Printing mode Less than 46 dBA Colo
249. ork Key should be created for the network Check this information before proceeding with the machine installation Infrastructure mode mak This is an environment generally used for homes ca and SOHOs This mode uses an access point to a communicate with the wireless machine e See Installing the machine on a wireless oe D 9 network with an Access Point Windows on kia page 3 e See Installing the machine on a wireless network with an Access Point Macintosh on page 6 Ad Hoc mode o This mode does not use an access point the ae lte wireless computer and wireless machine Y communicate directly e See Installing the machine on an Ad Hoc GN Quon wireless network Windows on page 5 e See Installing the machine on an Ad Hoc wireless network Macintosh on page 7 l4 After choosing your configuration follow the simple directions for your computer operating system but first locate the Software CD supplied with the machine before proceeding Installing a wireless network with the WPS button If your machine and an access point or wireless router support Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS you can easily configure the wireless network settings by pressing the WPS O button on the control panel See Setting a wireless network with WPS button on the control panel on page 2 Wireless network setup CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only 1 Installing a wireless network with cables You can install
250. ort See Printing a network configuration report on page 2 e Static IP assignment Use SetlP program to change the IP address from your computer In an office environment we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you IP setting using SetIP Program Windows This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine A MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report For using SetIP program disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following 1 Open Start gt All programs gt Control Panel 2 Double click Security Center 3 Click Windows Firewall 4 Disable the firewall Installing the program 1 Insert the software CD provided with your machine When the driver CD runs automatically close that window 2 Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive X represents your CD ROM drive 3 Double click Application gt SetIP 4 Double click Setup exe to install this program 5 Click OK If necessary select a language from the drop down list 6 Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation Starting the program 1 Connect your machine to the network with a network cable 2 Turned on the machine 3 From the Windows Start menu select All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt SetIP gt SetIP 4 Cl
251. ort You can print Network Configuration Report from the machine s control panel that will show the current machine s network settings This will help you to set up a network and troubleshoot problems 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until Network appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Network Info appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until Yes appears and press OK Using this Network Configuration Report you can find your machine MAC address and IP address For example e MAC Address 00 15 99 41 A2 78 e IP Address 192 0 0 192 Setting IP address First you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server located on the network In a few situations the IP address must be set manually This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons e DHCP IP assignment Connect your machine to the network and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the machine Then print the Network Configuration Report as explained above If the report shows that the IP address has changed the assignment was successful You will see the new IP address in the report e Static IP assignment Use SetIP program to change the IP address from your computer If your machine has a control panel yo
252. ou choose the display shows the message to allow you to change it To start over with another speed dial number press Back 6 Enter the name you want and press OK For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters See Entering characters using the number keypad CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only on page 2 7 Enter the fax number you want and press OK 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Editing speed dial numbers 1 Press Ss Fax on the control panel 2 Press Address Book on the control panel 3 Press the left right arrow until New amp Edit appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until Speed Dial appears and press OK 5 Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK 6 Change the name and press OK 7 Change the fax number and press OK 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Using speed dial numbers When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you want For a one digit 0 9 speed dial number press and hold the corresponding digit button on the number keypad For a two or three digit speed dial number press the first digit button s and then hold down the last digit button You can also search through memory for an entry by pressing Address Book See Searching Address Book for an entry on page 7 Group dial numbers If you frequently send the same document to several destinations you can gro
253. ou exit the Print window Z If your machine does not have a duplex unit you should complete the printing job manually The machine prints every other page of the document first After that a message appears on your computer Follow the on screen instructions to complete the printing job Change percentage of your document You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a percentage you want Ag 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Paper tab 3 Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box You can also click the up down arrows to select the scaling rate 4 Select the Size Source and Type in Paper Options 5 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Fitting your document to a selected paper size This feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the document size This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Paper tab 3 Select the paper size you want from the Fit to page 4 Select the Size Source and Type in Paper Options 5 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Using watermarks The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document
254. our print job To abort the current job click Cancel If an option is grayed out it means that the grayed out option is not supported by your machine Printing files You can print many different types of files on your machine using the standard CUPS way directly from the command line interface The CUPS LPR utility allows you to do that But the drivers package replaces the standard LPR tool by a much more user friendly LPR GUI program To print any document file 1 2 3 Type lpr sfile name from the Linux shell command line and press Enter The LPR GUI window appears When you type only Ipr and press Enter the Select file s to print window appears first Just select any files you want to print and click Open From the LPR GUI window select your machine from the list and change the print job properties Click OK to start printing Configuring Printer Properties Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration you can change the various properties for your machine 1 2 3 Open the Unified Driver Configurator If necessary switch to Printers configuration Select your machine from the available printers list and click Properties The Printer Properties window opens Printer Properties General Connecton Driver Jobs Classes Hama a The following five tabs display at the top of the window Printing_ 8 General This option allows you to change t
255. our machine is attached to your computer connected properly via the USB port and is turned on e Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system Open Unified Linux Driver configurator switch to Scanners configuration then press Drivers Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine s name is listed in the window e Ensure the port is not busy Since functional components of machine printer and scanner share the same I O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other user will encounter device busy response This usually happens when starting a scan procedure An appropriate message box appears To identify the source of the problem open the Ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner port s symbol dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by another application If this is the case you should either wait for completion of the current job or press the Release port button if you are sure that the present port application is not functioning
256. ow until the file containing the data you want to restore appears and press OK oe o TO Using USB memory device CLX 3185N CLX 3185FN CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FW only 2 8 Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the machine 9 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Managing USB memory You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device A After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device files cannot be restored Therefore confirm that you no longer need the data before deleting it Deleting an image file 1 Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Press Direct USB Press the left right arrow until File Manage appears and press OK Press OK when Delete appears Press the left right arrow until the folder or file you want to delete appears and press OK et a gall l4 If you see D in the front of a folder name there are one or more files or folders in the selected folder If you selected a file the display shows the size of the file for about 2 seconds Go to the next step If you selected a folder press the left right arrow until the file you want to delete appears and press OK 6 Press OK when Yes appears to confirm your selection 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Formatting a USB memory device 1 Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Press Direct US
257. per jam Inside the machine and in See In the paper exit in exit area the paper exit area area on page 4 Troubleshooting_ 2 Some messages may not appear on the display depending on options or models To avoid tearing the paper pull the jammed paper out slowly and carefully Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam In the tray if Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open and close the front door The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine If the paper does not eject go to the next step 2 Pull out tray 1 out of the machine N NN NANA N l NASAN O PING O pad 5 Par Z NG ININ Fa a SS rz ROL ROR Pa GA i I II or 7 CJ l ba PA as ee NY IN NN N If the paper does not eject when you pull or if you do not see the paper in this area check the fuser area around the toner cartridge See In the fuser unit area on page 3 4 Insert the tray 1 back into the machine until it snaps into place Printing automatically resumes In the fuser unit area Z Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam If paper is jammed in the fuser unit area follow the next steps to release the jammed paper 1 Open the scan unit first and then inner cover Do not touch the fuser inside the inner cover It is hot and could cause burns Take care when removin
258. play messages on page 5 to browse the detailed information on error messages A Samsung does not recommend using non genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured Samsung cannot guarantee non genuine Samsung toner cartridge s quality Service or repair required as a result of using non genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty Introduction_ 9 setting started This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the USB connected machine and software This chapter includes e Setting up the hardware e Supplied software e System requirements Z Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model Check your model name elllustrations may differ from your machine depending on the model or its options Check your model name Setting up the hardware This section shows the steps to set up the hardware as is explained in the Quick Installation Guide Make sure you read the Quick Installation Guide first and follow the steps below 1 Select a stable location Select a level stable place with adequate space for air circulation Allow extra space to open door s and tray s The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat cold and humidity Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table 482 6 mm 18 8 in Printing is suitable for altitud
259. preprinted letterhead paper in the machine instead you can Just print the letterhead overlay on your document A Creating a new page overlay To use a page overlay you must create a new page overlay file containing your content 1 Create or open a document containing the content you want to use in a new page overlay Position the items exactly where you want them to appear when they are added to the original 2 To save the document as an overlay access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 3 Click the Advanced tab and select Edit from the Text drop down list The Edit Overlay window appears 4 n the Edit Overlay window click Create 5 In the Save As window type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box Select the destination path if necessary The default is C Formover 6 Click Save The name appears on the Overlay List 7 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 8 The file is not printed Instead it is stored on your computer hard disk drive iH The overlay document size must match same as the document you print Do not create an overlay with a watermark Using a page overlay After an overlay has been created it is ready to be printed with your document To print an overlay with a document do the following 1 Create or open the document you want to print 2 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preference
260. press Enter in your keyboard iY In case the host computer requires a User name and Password fill in User ID and password of the host computer account 5 Right click the printer icon you want to share and select Connect 6 1f a set up complete message appears click OK 7 Open the file you want to print and start printing Macintosh The following steps are for Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 Refer to Mac Help for other versions Setting up a host computer 1 Install your printer driver See Macintosh on page 4 2 Open the Applications folder gt System Preferences and click Print amp Fax 3 Select your machine to share in the Printers list on the left pane of the window 4 Select Share this printer Setting up a client computer 1 Install your printer driver See Macintosh on page 4 2 Open the Applications folder gt System Preferences and click Print amp Fax 3 Press the icon A display window showing the name of your shared printer appears 4 Select your machine and click Add Getting started_ 6 network setu clx 3185n clx 3185wk clx 3185fn clx 3185f w only This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the network connected machine and software This chapter includes e Network environment e Introducing useful network programs e Using a wired network Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model Check your model name See Featu
261. printing on page 6 Linux basic printing See Linux printing on page 7 The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows XP Your Printing Preferences window may differ depending on your operating system or the application you are using Printing_ 1 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Select Print from the File menu The Print window appears 3 Select your machine from the Select Printer list pee General Select Printer Status Ready _ Print to fle Location Commer Page Range All Number of copies 1 You can select the basic print settings including the number of copies and the print range from within the Print window 4 To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver click Properties or Preferences in the application s Print window to change the print setting See Opening printing preferences on page 2 4 To start the print job click OK or Print in the Print window l4 If you are using Windows Internet Explorer the Samsung AnyWeb Print will save your time for screen captured images or printing the image Click Start gt All programs gt Samsung Printers gt Samsung AnyWeb Print gt Download the latest version to link the website where the tool is available for the download Canceling a print job If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler cancel the job as follows 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 For Windows Serve
262. properly The document has Update your Mac OS to Mac OS X 10 3 3 or printed but the print higher job has not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS X 10 3 2 Some letters are not Mac OS cannot create the font during the cover displayed normally page printing The English alphabet and during the cover numbers are displayed normally on the cover page printing page When printing a Make sure that the resolution setting in your document in Mac OS machine driver matches the one in Acrobat with Acrobat Reader Reader 6 0 or higher colors print incorrectly Z Refer to the Macintosh User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Macintosh error messages Troubleshooting_ 17 supplies and accessories This chapter provides information about purchasing supplies accessories and maintenance parts available for your machine This chapter includes e How to purchase e Available supplies e Available maintenance parts e Checking replaceable s lifespan Z elllustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your model name eAvailable accessories may differ from country to country Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies and maintenance parts How to purchase To order Samsung authorized supplies accessories and maintenance parts contact your local Samsung dealer or the retail
263. pt the current settings and continue the setup procedure Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen Then click Next 11 Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears 12 Select the components to be installed Click Next After selecting the components you can also change the machine name set the machine to be shared on the network set the machine as the default machine and change the port name of each machine Click Next 13 After the installation is finished a window asking you to print a test page appears If you want to print a test page click Print a test page Otherwise just click Next and go to step 16 14 If the test page prints out correctly click Yes If not click No to reprint it 15 To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from Samsung click On line Registration 16 Click Finish Installing the machine on a wireless network with an Access Point Macintosh Items to prepare Ensure you have next items ready e Access point eNetwork connected computer Software CD that provided with your machine The machine installed with a wireless network interface e USB cable Creating the infrastructure network in Macintosh When the items are ready follow below steps 1 Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine 2 Turn on your computer access point and machine 3 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive 4 Double click the CD RO
264. ption Address Book Clears all of the fax numbers entries stored in memory Fax Feature Darkness Sent Report Clears all records of sent faxes Resolution Scan Size Fax RCV Report Clears all records of received faxes Multi Send Delay Send Network Hani CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185 W Secure Receive on y Add Page You may set up the network with the machine s display screen Before doing Sanca that you must have the relevant information concerning the type of network Fax Setup Sending protocols and computer system you use If you are not sure which setting to Redial Times use contact your network administrator to configure this machine to the network 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until Network appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until the setup option you want appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the setting you want appears and press OK 5 Repeat steps 3 through 4 as needed 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Option Description TCP IP Select appropriate protocol and configure parameters to use the network environment 4 There are lots of parameters to be set If you are not sure leave as is or consult the network administrator TCP IP IPv6 Selects this option to use the network environment through IPv6 See IPv6 Configuration on page 6 Ethernet Speed Configure the network transmiss
265. pts during an operation Left Right Arrow Scrolls through the options available in the selected menu and increases or decreases values OK Confirms the selection on the screen Menu Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus See Menu overview on page 4 Stop Clear Stops an operation at any time In ready mode clears cancels the copy options such as the darkness the document type setting the copy size and the number of copies Wireless LED CLX 3185WK Shows the current status of the wireless network connection See Understanding the Status LED on page 8 Status LED Shows the status of your machine See Understanding the Status LED on page 8 Color Start Begins a printing job in color mode Black Start Begins a printing job in black and white mode Back Sends you back to the upper menu level Toner Color The toner colors shown below LCD display co works with the display messages See Acknowledging the status of the toner cartridge on page 9 AF PEB V PB Scan to Sends scanned data See Scanning originals and sending to your computer Scan to PC on page 1 Print Screen CLX 3185 Prints the displayed screen of your monitor See Print screen button CLX 3185 only on page 8 Direct USB CLX 3185N Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB memory port on the front of your machine See Using USB memory device
266. put area You can also use Addresses pressing button if you have stored frequently used fax numbers 7 If necessary enter the access code in Dialing Prefix input area 8 If necessary you can send the fax with cover page check Use Cover Page Enter the subject and message of the fax job IZ You can set more detailed options for cover page option in Samsung Fax Cover Page Select Samsung Fax Cover Page from the drop down list under Orientation 9 Click Fax 10 The Fax Journal icon appears on your Macintosh dock Click the icon You can see the status of the fax job You can also delete hold resume and pause the fax job Sending a fax in your machine This part explains how to send a fax and the special methods of transmission When you place the originals you can use either the document feeder or the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 1 If the originals are placed on both the document feeder and the scanner glass the machine will read the originals on the document feeder first which has higher priority in scanning Setting the fax header In some countries you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Machine Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Machine ID appears and press OK Enter your name or the company name us
267. puter 1 the machine by a USB cable Client computers Computers which use the machine shared 2 through the host computer Windows Setting up a host computer 1 Install your printer driver See Installing USB connected machine s driver on page 3 2 Click the Windows Start menu 3 For Windows Server 2000 select Settings gt Printers For Windows XP Server 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows Server 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Getting started_ 5 Devices and Printers 4 Right click on the printer icon 5 For Windows XP Server 2003 Server 2008 Vista press Properties For Windows 7 Server 2008 R2 from context menus select the Printer properties if If Printer properties item has a mark you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer 6 Select the Sharing tab 7 Check the Share this printer iY In Windows Vista or higher press Change sharing options before check the Share this printer 8 Fill in the Share Name field Click OK Setting up a client computer 1 Install your printer driver See Installing USB connected machine s driver on page 3 2 Click the Windows Start menu 3 Select All programs gt Accessories gt Windows Explorer 4 Enter in IP address of the host computer and
268. py Erasing background images You can set the machine to print an image without its background This copy feature removes the background color and can be helpful when copying an original containing color in the background such as a newspaper or a catalog 1 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ eFor CLX 3185 and CLX 3185N press Menu on the control panel For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW press 9 Copy and Menu in order on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Adjust Bkgd appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the background option you want appears Off Does not use this feature Auto Optimizes the background eEnhance Lev 1 2 The higher the number is the more vivid the background is Erase Lev 1 4 The higher the number is the lighter the background IS 5 Press OK to save the selection 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode o Gray enhance copying When you copy the original in black and white use this feature for the better quality of copy out put This feature is only for the copy in black and white 1 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ For CLX 3185 and CLX 3185N press Menu on the control panel For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW press 93 Copy and Menu in order on the control panel Press the left right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK Press
269. r 2000 select Settings gt Printers eFor Windows XP Server 2003 select Printer and Faxes For Windows Server 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 3 For Windows Server 2000 XP Server 2003 Vista or Server 2008 double click your machine For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 right click your printer icon gt context menus gt See what s printing l4 If See what s printing item has a B mark you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer 4 From the Document menu select Cancel You can also access this window by simply double clicking the machine icon ee in the Windows task bar You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop Clear on the control panel Opening printing preferences You can preview the settings you selected on the upper right of the Printing Preferences 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Select Print from the file menu The Print window appears 3 Select your machine from the Select Printer 4 Click Properties or Preferences Samsung Series Properties Basic Paper Graphics Advanced Samsung Orientation Letter O mm portrait 8 50 x 11 00 inches inch O Landscape _ Rotate 180 Degrees O Best Normal O Draft Layout Options
270. r CLX 3185 and CLX 3185N press Menu on the control panel For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW press lt Copy and Menu in order on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Layout appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Poster Copy appears and press OK to save the selection 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Your original is divided into 9 portions Each portion is scanned and printed one by one in the following order ee BO Clone copying Your machine can print multiple images copies from the original document a single page The number of images is automatically determined by the original image and paper size This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass ak lt Vad wh 1 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ For CLX 3185 and CLX 3185N press Menu on the control panel For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW press lt Copy and Menu in order on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Layout appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until Clone Copy appears and press OK to save the selection 5 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode K You cannot adjust the copy size using Reduce Enlarge menu while making a clone co
271. r fire and or injury to your pet If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions have been followed unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel gt Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire AN Caution Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing sef gt It can cause damage to the machine Ko Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper tray gt You may get injured S Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening gt This could result in elevated component temperatures which can cause damage or fire Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper gt New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts O O Safety information 2 When printing large quantities the bottom part of the paper output area may get hot Do not allow children to touch gt Burns can occur When removing jammed paper do not use tweezers or sharp metal objects gt It can damage the machine Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray gt It can damage the machine This machine s power interception device is the power cord gt To switch off the power supply remove the power cord from the electrical outlet Installation Moving A Warning O Do not place the machine in an area with dust mm humidity or water
272. r printing Less than 48 dBA Mono printing Copying mode e Mono copying ADF 52 dBA Scan glass 50 dBA e Color copying ADF 50 dBA Scan glass 48 ABA Standby mode Background noise Level Sleep mode Background noise Level Temperature Operation 10 to 32 C 50 to 89 6 F Storage packed O to 40 C 32 to 104 F Humidity Operation 20 to 80 RH Storage packed 10 to 90 RH a Sound Pressure Level ISO 7779 Configuration tested machine basic installation A4 paper simplex printing Specifications 1 Electrical specifications A Power requirements are based on the country region where the device is sold Do not convert operating voltages Doing so might damage the device and void the product warranty Item Description Power rating 110 volt models AC 110 127 V 220 volt models AC 220 240 V Power consumption Average operating mode Less than 350 W Ready mode Less than 60 W Power save mode e CLX 3185 CLX 3185N Less than 8 W e CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW Less than 11 W Power off mode Less than 0 45 W a See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage V frequency hertz and type of current A for your machine Specifications 2 Print media specifications Type Size Dimensions Weight Capacity Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm 8 50 x 11 00 inches 70 to
273. r printing using transparencies the picture quality would be lower than mono printing when the printouts are used on the overhead projector e Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand machine s fusing temperature e Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine e Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long periods of time Dust and dirt may accumulate on them resulting in spotty printing e To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints handle transparencies carefully e To avoid fading do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight e Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled curled or have any torn edges e Do not use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet e To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other do not let the printed sheets stack up as they are printed out e Recommended media Xerox 3R91331 A4 Xerox 3R2780 Letter Base type transparency ex Xerox 3R91331 results in better image and paper handling quality than paper backed ex Xerox 3R3028 or removable stripe 3R3108 ones A Transparency with static electricity can cause image quality problems eDepending on the selection or storage conditions of the transparency jam or image scratch might occur Labels To avoid damaging the machine use only labels designed for laser printers e When selecting labels consider the following factors Adhesives
274. r types in a tray e Use only recommended print media See Setting the paper size and type on page 6 e Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the tray Clearing original document jams CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only When an original document jams in the document feeder a warning message appears on the display To avoid tearing the document remove the jammed document slowly and carefully if To prevent document jams use the scanner glass for thick thin or mixed paper type originals 1 Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder 2 Open the document feeder cover iY If you see no paper in this area go to step 5 4 Close the document feeder cover Reload the pages you removed if any in the document feeder 5 Open the scanner lid 6 Seize the misfeed paper and remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands 1 scanner lid 7 Close the scanner lid Load the removed pages back into the document feeder Clearing paper jams When a paper jam occurs the warning message appears on the display screen Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam Message Location of Jam Go to Paper jam In the paper feed area See In the tray on in Tray 1 and inside the machine page 3 Paper jam Inside the machine See In the fuser unit inside machine area on page 3 Pa
275. r where you purchased the machine The warranty does not cover the replacement of any maintenance parts after their lifespan Supplies and accessories 1 Checking replaceable s lifespan If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems check the number of pages the machine has printed Replace the corresponding parts if necessary 1 Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Supplies Life appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the item you want appears and press OK Supplies Info Prints the supply information page Total Displays the total number of pages printed in color mode or black and white mode eADF Scan Displays the number of pages scanned using the ADF ePlaten Scan Displays the number of pages scanned using the scanner glass eImaging Unit Displays the number of pages scanned and printed Transfer Belt Displays the number of pages scanned and printed eFuser Displays the number of pages scanned and printed eTransferRoller Displays the number of pages scanned and printed eTray 1 Roller Displays the number of pages scanned and printed 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode ee ae Replacing the toner cartridge The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one yellow Y magenta
276. re only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label If the country you will be using the wireless device in is not listed contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time Because the wireless devices which may be embedded into your printer emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use Regardless of the power levels care should be taken to minimize human contact during normal operation As a general guideline a separation of 20 cm 8 inches between the wireless device and the body for use of a wireless device near the body this does not include extremities is typical This device should be used more than 20 cm 8 inches from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices Examples of common restrictions are listed below A Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while travelin
277. res by Models on page 2 Network environment You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine You can set up the basic network settings through the machine s control panel The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine Item Requirements Network interface e Ethernet 10 100 Base TX e 802 11b n g Wireless LAN CLX 3185WK and CLX 3185FW only Windows 2000 Server 2003 Server 2008 XP Vista 7 Server 2008 R2 e Various Linux OS e Mac OS X 10 3 10 6 Network operating system Network protocols e TCP IPv4 e DHCP BOOTP e DNS WINS Bonjour SLP UPnP Standard TCP IP Printing RAW LPR IPP WSD SNMPv 1 2 3 HTTP S IPSec TCP IPv6 DHCP DNS RAW LPR SNMPv 1 2 3 HTTP S IPSec See IPv6 Configuration on page 6 Wireless security e Authentication Open System Shared Key WPA Personal WPA2 Personal PSK e Encryption WEP64 WEP128 TKIP AES e Installing wired network connected machine s driver Pv6 Configuration Introducing useful network programs There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in network environment For the network administrator especially managing several machines on the network is possible 4 Before using the programs below set the IP address first SyncThru Web Service Web server embedded on your network machine which allows you to d
278. res incoming faxes in its memory Then as soon as you finish copying or printing the machine automatically prints the fax Adjusting the document settings Before starting a fax change the following settings according to your original s status to get the best quality Resolution The default document settings produces good results when using typical text based originals However if you send originals that are of poor quality or contain photographs you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax 1 Press Ss Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Resolution appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the option you want appears and press OK 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Recommended resolution settings for different original document types are described in the table below oS a mode recommended for Standard Originals with normal sized characters Fine Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals printed using a dot matrix printer Super Fine Originals containing extremely fine detail Super Fine mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution l4 eFor memory transmission Super Fine mode is not available The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine W
279. ress host name e mail address and SMTP server information the machine status toner cartridge shortage or machine error will be sent to a certain person s e mail automatically This option may be used more frequently by a machine administrator 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go 2 Your machine s embedded website opens 3 From the Settings tab select Machine Settings 5 E mail Notification i If you have not configured outgoing server environment go to Settings gt Network Settings gt Outgoing Mail Server SMTP to configure network environment before setting e mail notification 4 Select Enable check box to use the E mail Notification 5 Click Add button to add e mail notification user Set the recipient name and e mail address es with notification items you want to receive an alert for 6 Click Apply Z If the firewall is activated the e mail may not be sent successfully In that case contact the a network administrator Setting the system administrator information Set the system administrator information This setting is necessary for using the e mail notification option 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go 2 Your machine s embedde
280. rk Wireless network setup CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only 7 administrator to get the static IP address For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP check if DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window However if it shows Static click Change TCP IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically DHCP eFor the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static check if Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window However if it shows DHCP click Change TCP IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine Example If computer s network information is as below IP address 169 254 133 42 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Machine s network information should be as below IP address 169 254 133 43 Use computer s IP address with changed last three digits Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Use the computer s subnet mask Gateway 169 254 133 1 Change the last three digits from IP address of your machine to 1 17 The wireless network is connecting according to the network configuration 18 When the wireless network setting is completed disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine Click Next 19 The Installation process is being executed 20 The Fax Queue Creator window appears during the installation process For CLX 3185WK click Cancel to go to the next step For CLX 3185FW select your machine name from the
281. rs AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images the paper stock may be too slick Try different paper See Selecting print media on page 2 If characters are improperly formed and producing a wavy effect the scanner unit may need service For service contact a service representative Solid Color or Black pages The toner cartridge may not be installed properly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it The toner cartridge may be defective and need replacing Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 The machine may require repair Contact a service representative Page skew Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Check the paper type and quality See Selecting print media on page 2 Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack Loose toner Clean the inside of the machine See Cleaning the inside on page 1 Check the paper type and quality See Selecting print media on page 2 Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 If the problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Check the paper type and quality Both high temperature and humidity ca
282. rt your computer e The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off operating environment is not set up properly condition suggested solutions The incoming fax has blank spaces or is of poor quality e The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty e A noisy phone line can cause line errors e Check your machine by making a copy e Atoner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge life Replace the toner cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 Some of the words on an incoming fax are stretched The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam There are lines on the originals you sent Check your scan unit for marks and clean it See Cleaning the scan unit on page 3 Fax problems The machine dials a number but the connection with the other fax machine fails The other fax machine may be turned off out of paper or cannot answer incoming calls Speak with the other machine operator and ask her him to solve out the problem condition suggested solutions The machine is not working there is no display or the buttons are not working Unplug the power cord and plug it in again Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet Faxes do not store in memory There may not be enough memory space to store the fax If the display indicating the memory status shows delete any fax
283. rt menu 2 For Windows Server 2000 select Settings 5 Printers For Windows XP Server 2003 select Printer and Faxes For Windows Server 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 3 Right click your machine 4 For Windows XP Server 2003 Server 2008 Vista press Printing Preferences For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select the Printing preferences i If Printing preferences item has a B mark you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer 5 Change the settings on each tab 6 Click OK if If you want to change the settings for each print job change it in Printing Preferences Setting your machine as a default machine 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 For Windows Server 2000 select Settings gt Printers For Windows XP Server 2003 select Printer and Faxes For Windows Server 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 3 Select your machine 4 Right click your machine and select Set as Default Printer l4 For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 if Set as default printer item has a B mark
284. ru Web Service CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only To access SyncThru Web Service SyncThru Web Service overview E mail notification setup Setting the system administrator information Using the Smart Panel program Understanding Smart Panel Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings SmarThru Starting SmarThru Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator Opening the Unified Driver Configurator Printers configuration window Scanners configuration Ports configuration MAINTENANCE Adjusting the color contrast Finding the serial number Cleaning the machine Cleaning the outside Cleaning the inside Cleaning the scan unit Storing the toner cartridge Handling instructions Use of non Samsung and refilled toner cartridge Estimated cartridge life Maintenance parts Checking replacables Tips for moving amp storing your machine TROUBLESHOOTING Redistributing toner Tips for avoiding paper jams Clearing original document jams CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only Clearing paper jams In the tray In the fuser unit area In the paper exit area Understanding display messages Checking display messages Solving other problems Power problems Paper feeding problems Printing problems Printing quality problems Copying problems AON Nanna UNan Scanning problems Fax problems Samsung Scan and Fax Manager Problem Common Windows problems Common Linux problems Common Macintosh problems SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES How to pur
285. s Should it become necessary to reset the Samsung printer to its factory default settings please use the following steps Connect the machine to your network or you may connect the machine directly to a computer using the special network cable l4 If you cannot connect the machine to a computer from its former network it must be temporarily assigned to a new Ad Hoc network to access the SyncThru web page After you have established a direct link to the machine use the special network cable and follow these instructions to reset the machine to the factory defaults Resetting the machine to factory default settings Windows 1 Connect the special network cable between the machine and the PC 2 Open a browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of your machine The machine s SyncThru Web Service page will open 3 Select Settings gt Network Settings in the top menu bar 4 Select Restore Default in the left side bar and select the Clear button next to Factory Default or Network Click OK in each of the following three windows that pop up 5 Disconnect the printer from the network recycle the power and print a Network Configuration Report to confirm the reset This will reset all the parameters and the printer will no longer be on the network Resetting the machine to factory default settings Macintosh 1 Connect the special network cable between the printer and the Macintosh 2 Open System
286. s See Opening printing preferences on page 2 3 Click the Advanced tab 4 Select the desired overlay from the Text drop down list 5 If the overlay file you want does not appear in theText drop down list select Edit from the list and click Load Select the overlay file you want to use If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source you can also load the file when you access the Open window After you select the file click Open The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing Select the overlay from the Overlay List box 6 If necessary check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box If this box is checked a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing asking you to confirm you wish to print an overlay over your document If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected the overlay automatically prints with your document 7 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window The selected overlay prints over your document l4 The resolution of the overlay document must match the resolution of the original print job Deleting an overlay You can delete page overlays that you no longer use 1 In the Printing Preferences window click the Advanced tab 2 Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list 3 Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box 4 Click Delete 5 When the confirmation message window appears click Yes 6
287. s press OK when Yes appears and repeat Step 6 To continue to the next step press the left right arrow to select No and press OK 8 If the display asks if you want to send the email to your account press the left right arrow to select Yes or No and press OK 9 Enter an email subject and press OK 10 Press the left right arrow until the file format you want appears and press OK or Start Black or Color The machine begins scanning and then sends the email 11 If the machine asks if you want to log off your account press the left right arrow to select Yes or No and press OK 12 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Changing the settings for each scan job Your machine provides you with the following setting options to allow you to customize your scan jobs e Scan Size Sets the image size e Original Type Sets the original document s type e Resolution Sets the image resolution e Scan Color Sets the color mode e Scan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved If you select TIFF or PDF you can select to scan multiple pages Depending on the selected scan type this option may not appear To customize the settings before starting a scan job 1 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ For CLX 3185 CLX 3185N and CLX 3185WK press Menu on the control panel For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW press 3 Scan and Menu in order on the control panel 2 Press the left r
288. s and press OK Press the left right arrow until Paper Size appears and press OK Press the left right arrow to select the paper size you want Press OK to save the selection Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode NOOPOWN 3 fH If you want to use special sized paper such as a billing paper select Edit in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 ln the paper type Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Paper Type appears and press OK Press the left right arrow to select the paper type you want Press OK to save the selection Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode NONAGNA Using the output support iH The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number of pages at once Make sure that you do not touch the surface and do not allow children near it IZ Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your model name Media and tray_ 6 The printed pages stack on the output support and it will help the printed pages to align Media and tray 7 printing This chapter explains common printing tasks This chapter includes e Printer driver features e Basic printing e Opening printing preferences e
289. s not closed Close the door e Paper is jammed Clear the paper jam See Clearing paper jams on page 2 e No paper is loaded Load paper See Loading paper in the tray on page 4 e The toner cartridge is not installed Install the toner cartridge If a system error occurs contact a service representative The machine does not print The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is not enough to access the print job Allocate more hard disk Space on your computer for spooling and try printing The output tray is full It can hold up to 80 80 g m sheets of plain paper Once the paper is removed from the output tray the machine resumes printing If the machine is used for a long time continuously the printing speed could be slowed down or the machine could pause to cool down Wait for the machine to cool down Printing automatically resumes after the machine is cooled down The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source The paper source selection in the printer properties may be incorrect For many software applications the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the printer properties Select the correct paper source See the printer driver help screen
290. s to confirm the deletion 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Printing Address Book You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list 1 Press Ss Fax on the control panel 2 Press Address Book on the control panel 3 Press the left right arrow until Print appears and press OK The machine begins printing Printing sent fax report automatically You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the previous 50 communication operations including time and dates Press AS Fax on the control panel 3S Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until Fax Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Auto Report appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until On appears and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode oa SS YE Faxing CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only _ 8 using usb memory device clx 3185n clx 3185fn clx 3 185wk clx 3185f w only This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine This chapter includes e About USB memory e Plugging ina USB memory device e Scanning to a USB memory device About USB memory USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more room for storing documents presentations downloaded music and videos high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move You can do the following on your machine usin
291. scale rate 1 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ For CLX 3185 and CLX 3185N press Menu on the control panel For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW press 9 Copy and Menu in order on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Reduce Enlarge appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until Custom appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow to enter the copy size you want Pressing and holding the button allows you to quickly scroll to the number you want For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW you can also use the number keypad 6 Press OK to save the selection 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode When you make a reduced copy black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy Changing the default copy settings The copy options including darkness original type copy size and number of copies can be set to those most frequently used When you copy a document the default settings are used unless they have been changed by using the corresponding buttons on the control panel 1 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ For CLX 3185 and CLX 3185N press Menu on the control panel For CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW press lt Copy and Menu in order on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until Copy Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Change Default appears and pre
292. sconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine Click Next 19 The Installation process is being executed 20 The Fax Queue Creator window appears during the installation process For CLX 3185WK click Cancel to go to the next step For CLX 3185FW select your machine name from the Printer Name list and click Create When the confirmation window appears click OK 21 Click Continue on the Read Me window 22 After the installation is finished click Restart Installing the machine on an Ad Hoc wireless network Macintosh If you do not have a Access Point AP you may still connect the machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad Hoc wireless network by following these simple directions Items to prepare Ensure you have next items ready eNetwork connected computer e Software CD that provided with your machine e The machine installed with a wireless network interface e USB cable Creating the Ad Hoc network in Macintosh When the items are ready follow below steps 1 Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine 2 Turn on your computer and machine 3 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive 4 Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop 5 Double click the MAC Installer folder 6 Double click the Installer OS X icon 7 Enter the password and click OK 8 The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue 9 Read the license agreement and click C
293. select it from memory When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an email press Address Book See Searching Address Book for an entry on page 4 Searching Address Book for an entry There are two ways to search for an address in memory You can either scan from A to Z sequentially or search by entering the first letters of the name associated with the address Searching sequentially through memory 1 Press Address Book until Search 4 Send appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 2 Press the left right arrow until the number category you want appears and press OK 3 Press OK when All appears 4 Press the left right arrow until the name and address you want appears You can search upwards or downwards through the entire memory in alphabetical order Searching with a particular first letter 1 Press Address Book until Search 4 Send appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 2 Press the left right arrow until the number category you want appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until ID appears and press OK 4 Enter the first few letters of the name you want appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the name you want appears and press OK Printing Address Book You can check your address Book settings by printing a list 1 Press Address Book until Print appears on the bottom of the display 2 Press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until th
294. serial number by taking the following steps Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Serial Number appears and press OK Check your machine s serial number Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode en SS YS Cleaning the machine If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment you need to clean your machine regularly to keep the most optimum print quality A eCleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol solvent or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet elf your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner we recommend that you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it If you use a vacuum cleaner toner blows in the air and might be harmful if inhaled e Storing the toner cartridge e Maintenance parts e Tips for moving amp storing your machine Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft and lint free cloth Dampen the cloth slightly with water but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine Cleaning the inside During the printing process paper toner and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine This buildup can cause print quality problems such as toner specks or smearing Cle
295. settings Installing wired network connected machine s driver Windows Macintosh Linux IPv6 Configuration Activating IPv6 Setting IPv6 addresses Using SyncThru Web Service WIRELESS NETWORK SETUP CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK ONLY Using a wireless network Choosing your network connection Printing a network configuration report IP addresses Wireless network name and Network Key Installing a wireless network with the WPS button Installing a wireless network with cables Setting a wireless network with WPS button on the control panel Items to prepare Choosing your network connection Changing WPS mode Setting a wireless network in PBC mode Setting a wireless network in PIN mode Setting a wireless network with USB cable Installing the machine on a wireless network with an Access Point Windows Installing the machine on an Ad Hoc wireless network Windows Installing the machine on a wireless network with an Access Point Macintosh Installing the machine on an Ad Hoc wireless network Macintosh Setting a wireless network with network cable Preparing items Setting IP address Configuring the machine s wireless network Resetting factory default values Resetting the machine to factory default settings Windows Resetting the machine to factory default settings Macintosh Network parameter setting hRBRWW WWW DON DY DODD DDODDODANANOBBBRANNNN gt gt Completing the Installation Troubleshooting Wireless network problems Solving oth
296. ss OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the setup option you want appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the setting you want appears and press OK 6 Repeat steps 4 through 5 as needed Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode 7 While you are setting copy options pressing Stop Clear cancels the changed settings and restores the defaults kaa ID card copying Your machine can print 2 sided originals on one sheet The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as business card The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature 1 Press ID Copy on the control panel 2 Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown Then close the scanner lid 3 Place Front Side and Press Start appears on the display 4 Press Color Start or Black Start Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Back Side and Press Start 5 Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown Then close the scanner lid 6 Press Color Start to begin color copying Or press Black Start to begin black and white copying l4 elf you do not press the Color Start or Black Start button only the front side will be copi
297. sue dampened with water to clean If you use a vacuum cleaner toner blows into the air 11 Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on then might be harmful if inhaled l4 After cleaning let the machine to dry completely Maintenance_ 2 Cleaning the scan unit Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed Z The procedure may differ depending on your model Check your model name The following procedure is for CLX 3185 CLX 3185N and CLX 3185WK 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner lid 3 Wipe the surface of the scanner glass until it is clean and dry 4 Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean and dry 5 Close the scanner lid The following procedure is for CLX 3185FN and CLX 3185FW 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner lid 3 Wipe the surface of the scanner glass until it is clean and dry 1 Scanner lid 2 Scanner glass 3 ADF sheet 4 White sheet 4 Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean and dry 5 Push the ADF sheet with any tool such as tweezers carefully 6 Hold the edge of the ADF sheet and wipe both sides of the ADF sheet until it is clean and dry 8 Close
298. system with a different system so that the second system behaves like the first system Glossary_ 2 Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior which is in contrast to simulation which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated often considering its internal state Ethernet Ethernet is a frame based computer networking technology for local area networks LANs It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer and frame formats and protocols for the media access control MAC data link layer of the OSI model Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802 3 It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present EtherTalk A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking FDI Foreign Device Interface FDI is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine FTP A File Transfer Protocol FTP is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP IP protocol such as the Internet or an intranet Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media It consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller After toner is transferred onto the p
299. t BIOS refer to your computer user s guide Blank copies print out Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass Image rubs off the copy easily e Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package e In high humidity areas do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time Frequent copy paper Jams Occur e Fan the stack of paper then turn it over in the tray Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply Check adjust the paper guides if necessary e Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight e Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared Troubleshooting_ 14 Condition Suggested solutions Message appears on your computer screen ex Device can t be set to the H W mode you want e Port is being used by another program e Port is Disabled e Scanner is busy receiving or printing data When the current job is completed try again e Invalid handle e Scanning has failed e There may be a copying or printing job in progress Try your job again when that job is finished e The selected port is currently being used Restart your computer and try again e The machine cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off e The scanner driver is not installed or the e Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on then resta
300. t arrow to select the mode you want Press OK to save the selection Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode eae ee ABO Setting sounds Press the left right arrow until Machine Setup appears and press OK 1 2 3 4 You can control the following options model name e Key sound Turns the key sound On or Off With this option set to On a tone sounds each time a key is pressed e Alarm Sound Turns the alarm sound On or Off With this option set On an alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax communication ends e Speaker Turns On or Off the sounds from the telephone line through the speaker such as a dial tone or a fax tone With this option set to Comm which means Common the speaker is on until the remote machine answers IZ You can adjust the volume level using On Hook Dial If your handset e Ringer Adjusts the ringer volume For the ringer volume you can select Off Low Mid and High Key sound and alarm sound CLX 3185 CLX 3185N ly Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Select Key Sound or Alarm Sound Select On or Off and press OK If necessary repeat steps 4 through 5 to set other sounds Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Speaker ringer key sound and alarm sound CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and
301. tabs Printers and Classes Printers tab View the current system s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window Shows all of the machine classes B Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the class Refresh Renews the classes list eAdd Class Allows you to add a new machine class eRemove Class Removes the selected machine class Fselected printer Local prnierjidie Moge URI Switches to Printers configuration 2 Shows all of the installed machine Shows the status model name and URL of your machine The printer control buttons are as follows eRefresh Renews the available machines list Add Printer Allows you to add a new machines Management tools 4 Scanners configuration In this window you can monitor the activity of scanner devices view a list of installed Samsung machine devices change device properties and scan images 3 Jase sane TPE Exit 3 Shows the port type device connected to the port and status Switches to Scanners configuration Shows all of the installed scanners Shows the vendor model name and type of your scanner Sos e Properties Allows you to change the scan properties and scan a document Ports configuration In
302. tension phone and hear fax tones press the keys 9 on the extension phone The machine receives the fax Press the buttons slowly in sequence If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine try pressing 9 once again 9 is the remote receive code preset at the factory The first and the last asterisks are fixed but you can change the middle number to whatever you wish For details about changing the code see Changing the fax setup options on page 1 Receiving automatically in Answering Machine Fax mode To use this mode you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine See Rear view on page 5 If the caller leaves a message the answering machine stores the message as it would normally If your machine detects a fax tone on the line it automatically starts to receive the fax IZ elf you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine is switched off or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined number of rings elf your answering machine has a user selectable ring counter set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring elf you are in Tel mode when the answering machine is connected to your machine you must switch off the answering machine Otherwise the outgoing message from the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation Receiving faxes using DRPD mode Disti
303. the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson th cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the
304. the Plain paper section 111 to 220 g m 30 to 58 Ibs bond Matte photo Letter A4 Postcard 4 x6 Refer to the Pain paper section 111 to 220 g m 30 to 58 Ibs bond tray Minimum size custom 76 x 152 4 mm 3 x 6 inches Maximum size custom 216 x 356 mm 8 50 x 14 02 inches 60 to 163 g m 16 to 43 Ibs bond a f media weight is over 120 g m 32 Ibs load a paper into the tray one by one b Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight thickness and environmental conditions c The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 sheffield This means the numeric level of smoothness d Recommended media Transparency for a color laser printers by Xerox 3R91331 A4 or Xerox 3R2780 Letter e Recommended media 0 104 to 0 124 mm 0 004094 to 0 004882 inches thickness of transparency paper f Recommended media Glossy paper Letter for this machine by HP Brochure Paper Product Q6611A Glossy paper A4 for this machine by HP Laser Professional paper 130 glossy Product Q2552A HP Professional paper 150 glossy Product CG965A and HP Professional Laser paper 120 soft glossy Product Q6542A Matte paper A4 for this machine by HP Photo Laser Paper 220 matt Product Q6550A Specifications 3 contact samsung worldwide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products contact the Samsung customer care center Country Regio n
305. ther size you must adjust the paper length guide properly 1 Paper extend lever 2 Paper cover 3 Paper length guide 4 Paper width guide Media and tray 2 1 2 Pressing and unlatching the guide lock in the top of the tray pull the tray Pull the tray out of the machine Open the paper cover and remove paper from the tray if necessary out manually 4 Slide the paper length guide until it lightly touches the end of the paper stack Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the paper stack without causing it to bend For paper smaller than Letter sized return the paper guides to their original positions and adjust the paper length guide and paper width guide If the paper that you need to print is shorter than 222 mm 8 74 inches press and unlatch the guide lock in the tray Unextend the tray by pushing manually the extended portion back into the tray Adjust the paper length guide and paper width guide l4 eDo not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp eDo not use a paper with more than 6 mm 0 24 inch curl elf you do not adjust the paper width guide it may cause paper jams papa i Close the paper cover Slide the tray back into the machine After loading paper set the paper type and size for the tray See Setting the paper size and type on page 6 Z eDue to insufficient paper in the tr
306. tinations Receiving a fax in your machine This part explains how to receive a fax and the special receiving methods available Changing the receive modes Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory When you receive a fax the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax But if you want to change the Fax mode to another mode follow the steps below 1 Press Ss Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until Fax Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Receiving appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Receive Mode appears and press OK ol a eFax Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax reception mode eTel Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then Start If your machine has a handset you can receive a fax by picking up the handset eAns Fax Is for when an answering machine attached to your machine Your machine answers an incoming call and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax eDRPD you can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD feature Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers For further
307. ting posters This feature allows you to print a single page document onto 9 sheets of paper for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster size document rire AED h A 3x3 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Basic tab select Poster Printing in the Type drop down list 3 Select the page layout you want Available layouts ePoster 2x2 Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages ePoster 3x3 Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages ePoster 4x4 Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16 pages 4 Select the Poster Overlap value Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together ks le 10 mm KTS EG J kak LA 5 Click the Paper tab select the Size Source and Type 6 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 7 You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together Printing booklets Manual This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet 1 To change the print settings from your software application access the Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 C
308. tion However if you want to set the wireless network directly select Custom 8 Select the one Network Name SSID in the list eSSID SSID Service Set Identifier is a name that identifies a wireless network Access points and wireless devices attempting to connect to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is case sensitive Operation Mode Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless connections See Wireless network name and Network Key on page 1 Ad hoc Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with each other in a peer to peer environment Infrastructure Allows wireless devices to communicate with each other through an access point Wireless network setup CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only 9 iY If your network s Operation Mode is Infrastructure select the SSID of the access point If the Operation Mode is Ad hoc select the machine s SSID Note that portthru is the default SSID of your machine 9 Click Next If wireless security setting window appears enter the registered password network key and click Next 10 The confirmation window appears please check your wireless setup If the setup is right click Apply Disconnect the network cable standard or network Your machine should then start communicating wirelessly with the network In case of Ad hoc mode you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously Resetting factory default value
309. tional devices and features may differ according to your model Check your model name See Features by Models on page 2 Preparing to fax Before you send or receive a fax you need to connect the supplied line cord to your telephone wall jack Refer to the Quick Installation Guide how to make a connection The method of making a telephone connection is different from one country to another Using a fax in your computer You can send and receive a fax from your computer without going to the machine Sending a fax Windows To send a fax from your computer the Samsung Network PC Fax program must be installed This program will be installed when you installed the printer driver 1 Open the document to be sent 2 Select Print from the File menu The Print window will be displayed It may look slightly different e Adjusting the document settings e Forwarding a fax to another destination e Setting up Address Book e Printing sent fax report automatically depending on your application 3 Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window 4 Click Print or OK Then a windows like the image below will appear Fax Options Fax Machine Model IP Address or Name USB Phonebook Recipients Name Fax Number rm Fax number gt gt Office Outlook Address Book Fax Quality indows Address Book standard O Fine Cover Page _ Use cover page eRe To
310. ttings gt Network Settings 6 Click Restore Default on the left pane of the website 7 Click Clear 8 Click Yes when the confirmation window appears 9 Click OK when the success window appears 10 Turn off and restart machine to apply settings Installing wired network connected machine s driver Windows You can set up the machine driver follow the steps below This is recommended for most users All components necessary for machine operations will be installed 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network or USB and powered on 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive Network setup CLX 3185N CLX 3185WK CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only _ 3 The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appears elf the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive Click OK elf you use Windows Vista Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start gt All programs gt Accessories gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive and click OK elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control windows elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Yes i
311. ttings on page 5 Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Multi Send appears and press OK Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK You can press speed dial numbers or select group dial number using Address book button For details see Setting up Address Book on page 6 8 Enter the second fax number and press OK nag SS The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document 9 To enter more fax numbers press OK when Yes appears and repeat steps 7 and 8 You can add up to 10 destinations 10 Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory i Once you entered a group dial number you cannot enter another group dial numbers anymore 11 When you have finished entering fax numbers press the left right arrow to select No at the Another No prompt and press OK 12 If an original is placed on the scanner glass select Yes to add another pages Load another original and press OK When you have finished select No at the Another Page prompt The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the order in which you entered them Delaying a fax transmission You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present You cannot send a color fax using this feature 1 Press lt amp Fax on the control panel 2 Load originals face
312. u can also change IP address using the machine s control panel In an office environment we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set IP address for you IPv4 setting using control panel Windows 1 Connect your machine to the network with a network cable 2 Turn on the machine 3 Press Menu on the control panel 4 Press the left right arrow until Network appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until TCP IP appears and press OK 6 Press the left right arrow until Static appears and press OK 7 Press the left right arrow until IP Address appears and press OK 8 Enter the IP address using numeric keypad and press OK iY Enter a byte between 0 and 255 using the number keypad and press the left right arrow to move between bytes Repeat this to complete the address from the 1st byte to the 4th byte 9 Enter other parameters such as the Subnet Mask and Gateway appears and press OK 10 After entering all parameters press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Now go to Installing wired network connected machine s driver on page 3 IPv4 setting using SetIP Program Windows This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine A MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report Before using SetIP program disable the computer firewall by performing the following st
313. up CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only 10 Subnet address 255 255 255 0 Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal including baby Gateway address 192 168 1 1 monitors motors cordless phones security system cameras other Type in the following addresses for your machine wireless networks and some Bluetooth devices IP address 192 168 1 101 Subnet address 255 255 255 0 Gateway address 192 168 1 1 Solving other problems If problems occur while using the machine on a network check the followings Z For information on access point or wireless router refer to its own user s guide e Your computer access point or machine may not be turned on Check if they are powered on e Check the wireless reception around the machine If the reception is far from the machine or there is an obstacle you might have difficulty receiving the signal e Cycle the power for access point or wireless router machine and computer Sometimes cycling the power can recover network communication e Check whether firewall software V3 or Norton is blocking the communication If the computer and the machine is connected on a same network it cannot be searched firewall software might be blocking the communication Refer to the user s guide for the software to turn it off and try searching the machine again e Check whether the machine s IP address is allocated correctly You can check the IP address by printing the network configurati
314. up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs See Adjusting the document settings on page 5 Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Delay Send appears and press OK Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK You can press speed dial numbers or select group dial number using Address book button For details see Setting up Address Book on page 6 oS ot 8 The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document 9 To enter more fax numbers press OK when Yes appears and repeat steps 7 You can add up to 10 destinations iH Once you entered a group dial number you cannot enter another group dial numbers anymore 10 When you have finished entering fax numbers press the left right arrow to select No at the Another No prompt and press OK 11 Enter the job name you want and press OK For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters see Entering characters using the number keypad CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only on page 2 If you do not want to assign a name skip this step 12 Enter the time using the number keypad and press OK K If you set a time earlier than the current time the fax will be sent at that time on the following day The original is scanned into memory before transmiss
315. up these destinations and set them under a group dial number You can then use a group dial number to send a document to all of the destinations within the group You can set up to 200 1 through 200 group dial numbers using the destination s existing speed dial numbers Registering a group dial number 1 Press Ss Fax on the control panel 2 Press Address Book on the control panel 3 Press the left right arrow until New amp Edit appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until Group Dial appears and press OK 5 Enter a group dial number between 1 and 200 and press OK If an entry is already stored in the number you choose the display shows the message to allow you to change it 6 Enter the name you want and press OK For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters See Entering characters using the number keypad CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only on page 2 7 Enter the speed dial number you want and press OK 8 Press OK when the speed dial information appears correctly 9 Press OK when Yes appears at the Add prompt 10 Press OK when Yes appears at the Another No prompt Repeat steps 7 and 10 to include other speed dial numbers into the group 11 When you have finished press the left right arrow to select No at the Another No prompt and press OK 12 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Editing a group dial number 1 Press Ss Fax on the control panel 2 Press Address Book on the control panel 3
316. uter or the network settings have been changed the Connecting Failed and the Wait 2 minutes for Reconnecting messages appear in turn on the display and then the machine tries to re connect to the wireless network After the second attempt to connect the machine stops the wireless connection function if the machine fails to get the wireless connection Try again to connect to the wireless network after solving the connection problem Canceling a wireless network connection process in PIN mode To cancel the wireless network connection function when the machine is connecting to the access point or wireless router in PIN mode press the WPS O button on the control panel again The Connecting Canceled and the Wait 2 minutes for Reconnecting messages appear in order on the display Disconnecting a wireless network connection in PIN Setting a wireless network in PIN mode Factory default in your machine is PBC mode To change to PIN mode refer to Changing WPS mode on page 2 mode To disconnect the wireless network connection press the WPS O Connecting a wireless network in PIN mode To connect to the wireless network in PIN mode follow the steps below You also need to check the status of the WPS O button and the wireless LED 1 Press the WPS O button for more than four seconds on the control panel 2 Enter xxxx xxxx on AP 02 00 Eight digit PIN number appears on the display Then the machine starts waitin
317. utton on the control panel The Push Button Configuration PBC method allows you to connect your machine to a wireless network by pressing both the WPS button on the control panel of your machine and the WPS PBC button on a Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS enabled access point or wireless router respectively The Personal Identification Number PIN method helps you connect your machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS enabled access point or wireless router Factory default in your machine is PBC mode which is recommended for a typical wireless network environment Access point or wireless router that supports WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup M has the symbol shown below Wi Fi PROTECTED SETUP Changing WPS mode Factory default in your machine is PBC mode To change WPS mode follow the steps below 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the left right arrow until Network appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Wireless appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until WPS Setting appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the WPS mode you want appears and press OK ePBC mode Pressing both the WPS O button on the control panel of your machine and the WPS PBC button on a Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS enabled access point or wireless router respectively you can easily connect your machine to a wirel
318. ve on the toolbar 12 Select the file directory where you want to save the image and enter the file name 13 Click Save Adding Job Type Settings You can save your scan option settings for later use To save a new Job Type setting 1 Change the options from the Scanner Properties window 2 Click Save As 3 Enter the name for your setting 4 Click OK Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop down list To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job 1 Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop down list 2 The next time you open the Scanner Properties window the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan job To delete a Job Type setting 1 Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop down list 2 Click Delete The setting is deleted from the list Using the Image Manager The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools to edit your scanned image Use the following tools to edit the image Scanning_ 8 Tools Name Function aa Save Saves the image is Undo Cancels your last action a Redo Restores the action you canceled a Scroll Allows you to scroll through the image Crop Crops the selected image area Zoom Out Zooms the image out kei j Zoom In Zooms the image in FR Scale Allows you to scale the image size you can L enter the size manually or set the rate to scale proportionall
319. verage Fuser unit Approx 50 000 black pages or 12 500 color pages Transfer roller Approx 50 000 black pages or 12 500 color pages Transfer unit ITB Approx 50 000 black pages or 12 500 color pages Pick up roller Approx 50 000 pages We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized service provider dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine The warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after their lifespan The battery inside the machine is a service component Do not change it by yourself There is risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type Dispose of used batteries according to your local environmental guidelines Don t puncture or incinerate the battery Checking replacables If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems check the number of pages the machine has printed or scanned Replace the corresponding parts if necessary Press Menu on the control panel Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Supplies Life appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the item you want appears and press OK eSupplies Info Prints the supply information page eTotal Displays the total number of pages printed eADF Scan Displays the number of pages printed by using the ADF ePlaten Scan
320. w and click Preview to see how your options affect the picture 7 Click Next 8 Enter a picture name and select a file format and destination to save the picture 9 Your picture has been successfully copied to your computer Choose one of the options on screen 10 Click Next 11 Click Finish Windows Vista 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 1 3 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Scanners and Cameras 4 Double click Scan a document or picture Windows Fax and Scan application appears l4 eYou can click on View scanners and cameras to view scanners elf there is no Scan a document or picture open the MS paint program and from the File click From Scanner or Camera 5 Click New Scan Scan driver appears 6 Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture 7 Click Scan fH If you want to cancel the scan job press the Cancel button on the Scanning 6 Scanner and Camera wizard Windows 7 1 2 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 1 From the Start menu sele
321. w until Forward appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until E mail appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Rev Forward appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been completed select Forward amp Print 8 Enter the sender s email address when From appears on the display and press OK 9 Enter the recipient s email address when DestinationEmail appears on the display and press OK 10 Then the setting is saved 11 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email address NOARWHN Setting up Address Book You can set up Address Book with the fax numbers you use most frequently Your machine provides you with the following features for setting up Address Book l4 Before beginning to store fax numbers make sure that your machine is in Fax mode Speed dial numbers You can store up to 240 frequently used fax numbers in speed dial numbers Faxing CLX 3185FN CLX 3185FW only _ 6 Registering a speed dial number 1 Press sz Fax on the control panel 2 Press Address Book on the control panel 3 Press the left right arrow until New amp Edit appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until Speed Dial appears and press OK 5 Enter a speed dial number between 1 and 240 and press OK If an entry is already stored in the number y
322. want to print a test page click Print a test page Otherwise just click Next and go to step 16 14 If the test page prints out correctly click Yes If not click No to reprint it 15 To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from Samsung click On line Registration 16 Click Finish Wireless network setup CLX 3185FW CLX 3185WK only 4 Installing the machine on an Ad Hoc wireless network Windows If you do not have an Access Point AP you may still connect the machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad Hoc wireless network by following the simple steps below Items to prepare Ensure you have next items ready eNetwork connected computer e Software CD provided with your machine e The machine installed with a wireless network interface e USB cable Creating the Ad Hoc network in Windows When the items are ready follow below steps 1 Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine 2 Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine 3 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appear elf the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive Click OK elf you use Windows Vista Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start gt All programs gt Accessories gt Run Type X Setup exe repl
323. work connection process in PBC mode To cancel the wireless network connection function when the machine is connecting to the access point or wireless router in PBC mode press the WPS button on the control panel again The Connecting Canceled and the Wait 2 minutes for Reconnecting messages appear in order on the display Disconnecting a wireless network connection in PBC mode To disconnect the wireless network connection press the WPS O button on the control panel again When the access point Wi Fi Network is in idle mode The Disconnected message appears on the display The machine is returned to ready mode When the access point Wi Fi Network is being used The Wait Job to Finish message appears on the display The machine waits until the current job is finished Then the wireless network connection is automatically disconnected The machine is returned to ready mode 1 Connecting If you press the WPS O button on the control panel when the wireless function is off the machine automatically tries to re connect to the access point or wireless router with the previously used wireless connection settings and address 2 Connected When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network the blue wireless LED light stays on AP SSID After completing the wireless network connection process AP s SSID information appears on the display IZ If there is no previously used access point or wireless ro
324. y e Check if your application has special print option such as oraw If oraw is specified in the command line parameter then remove it to print properly For Gimp front end select print gt Setup printer and edit command line parameter in the command item e The CUPS Common Unix Printing System version distributed with SuSE Linux 9 2 cups 1 1 21 has a problem with ipp Internet Printing Protocol printing Use the socket printing instead of ipp or install a later version of CUPS cups 1 1 22 or higher The machine does not print whole pages and output is printed on half the page It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8 51 or earlier of Ghostscript 64 bit Linux OS and has been reported to bugs ghostscript com as Ghostscript Bug 688252 The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v 8 52 or above Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http sourceforge net projects ghostscript and install it to solve this problem Troubleshooting_ 16 condition Suggested solutions condition Suggested solutions cannot scan via Gimp Front end Check if Gimp Front end has Xsane Device dialog on the Acquire menu If not you should install Xsane plug in for Gimp on the your computer You can find Xsane plug in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page For the detailed information refer to the Help for Li
325. y vertically or horizontally El Rotate Allows you to rotate the image you can select Lr the number of degrees from the drop down list 4 Flip Allows you to flip the image vertically or LT horizontally A Brightness Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast By of the image or to invert the image g g Properties Shows the properties of the image For further details about the Image Manager application refer to the on screen help Scanning 9 faxing clx 3185fn clx 3185fw only This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine This chapter includes e Preparing to fax e Using a fax in your computer e Sending a fax in your machine e Receiving a fax in your machine Z eYou cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone For more information ask your internet service provider eWe recommend using traditional analog phone services PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network when connecting telephone lines to use a fax machine If you use other Internet services DSL ISDN VoIP you can improve the connection quality by using the Micro filter The Micro filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or Internet quality Since the DSL Micro filter is not provided with the machine contact your Internet service provider for use on DSL Micro filter 1 Line port 2 Micro filter 3 DSL modem Telephone line Supported op
326. you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer Printing to a file PRN You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file You can print the document to a file instead of routing it directly to a printer The document is saved with the printer formatting such as font selection and color specifications in a prn file that can be printed on another printer To save a print job as a file 1 Check the Print to file box at the Print window Status Ready Pinte ie Location Comment Find Printer Printer Page Range al Number of copies 1 1 4 3 HC 3 ope ope 2 Click Print 3 Type in the destination path and the file name and then click OK For example c Temp file name iY If you type in only the file name the file is automatically saved in My Documents The saved folder may differ depending on your operating system Macintosh printing This section explains how to print a document in a Macintosh operating system Printing a document When you print with a Macintosh you need to check the printer driver setting in each application you use Follow the steps below to print from a Macintosh 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup 3 Choose your paper size orientation scaling or other options and make sure that your machine is selected Settings Page Attributes 44 Format for HH Paper Size A4 I8
327. you want Press the button until the correct letter appears on the display For example to enter the letter O press 6 labeled with MNO Each time you press 6 the display shows a different letter M N O m n o and finally 6 You can enter special characters such as space plus sign and etc For details see the below section To enter additional letters repeat step 1 If the next letter is printed on the same button move the cursor by pressing the left right arrow button and then press the button labeled with the letter you want The cursor will move to the right and the next letter will appear on the display You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice When you have finished entering letters press OK Keypad letters and numbers Key Assigned numbers letters or characters 1 ABCabc2 DEFdef3 GHIghi4 JKLjKI5 MNOmno6 NG Dj A W DM gt PQRSpars 7 Basic setup_ 2 Key Assigned numbers letters or characters 8 TUVtuv8 9 WXYZwxyz9 0 amp 0 Correcting numbers or names If you make a mistake while entering a number or name press the left right arrow button to delete the last digit or character Then enter the correct number or character Inserting a pause With some telephone systems you must dial an access code 9 for example and listen for a second dial tone In such cases you must insert a pause in the telephone num

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

インサート軸受ユニット 取 扱 説 明 書  Mode d`emploi pour l`usager    Deutsch  Sea Gull Lighting 41380-829 Installation Guide    Minka Lavery 4134-84 Instructions / Assembly  Harbor Freight Tools 3_1/2 Cubic Ft. Cement Mixer Product manual  Panduit Fiber Adapter Panels  取扱説明書 (3.63 MB/PDF)  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file